Mercurial > vim
annotate runtime/doc/options.txt @ 14372:2a4a2dc35c55
Update runtime files.
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/a9604e61451707b38fdcb088fbfaeea2b922fef6
Author: Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
Date: Sat Jul 21 05:56:22 2018 +0200
Update runtime files.
author | Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org> |
---|---|
date | Sat, 21 Jul 2018 06:00:09 +0200 |
parents | 4a588e3afd4a |
children | 2f7e67dd088c |
rev | line source |
---|---|
13963 | 1 *options.txt* For Vim version 8.1. Last change: 2018 May 15 |
7 | 2 |
3 | |
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar | |
5 | |
6 | |
7 Options *options* | |
8 | |
9 1. Setting options |set-option| | |
10 2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting| | |
11 3. Options summary |option-summary| | |
12 | |
10244
876fbdd84e52
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ec618c9feac4573b154510236ad8121c77d0eca
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10218
diff
changeset
|
13 For an overview of options see quickref.txt |option-list|. |
7 | 14 |
15 Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to | |
16 achieve special effects. These options come in three forms: | |
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle* | |
18 number has a numeric value | |
19 string has a string value | |
20 | |
21 ============================================================================== | |
523 | 22 1. Setting options *set-option* *E764* |
7 | 23 |
24 *:se* *:set* | |
25 :se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value. | |
26 | |
27 :se[t] all Show all but terminal options. | |
28 | |
29 :se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the | |
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated | |
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal | |
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either... | |
33 | |
34 *E518* *E519* | |
35 :se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}. | |
36 | |
37 :se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on. | |
38 Number option: show value. | |
39 String option: show value. | |
40 | |
41 :se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off. | |
42 | |
2152 | 43 *:set-!* *:set-inv* |
7 | 44 :se[t] {option}! or |
45 :se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi} | |
46 | |
47 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim* | |
48 :se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the | |
49 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi} | |
50 :se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi} | |
51 :se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi} | |
52 | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
53 :se[t] all& Set all options to their default value. The values of |
7051
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
54 these options are not changed: |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
55 all terminal options, starting with t_ |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
56 'columns' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
57 'cryptmethod' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
58 'encoding' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
59 'key' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
60 'lines' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
61 'term' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
62 'ttymouse' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
63 'ttytype' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
64 Warning: This may have a lot of side effects. |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
65 {not in Vi} |
7 | 66 |
67 *:set-args* *E487* *E521* | |
68 :se[t] {option}={value} or | |
69 :se[t] {option}:{value} | |
70 Set string or number option to {value}. | |
71 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal, | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
72 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0'). |
7 | 73 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by |
74 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is | |
75 set). See |cmdline-completion|. | |
76 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and | |
77 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value} | |
78 is not allowed. | |
79 See |option-backslash| for using white space and | |
80 backslashes in {value}. | |
81 | |
82 :se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=* | |
83 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the | |
84 {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
85 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
86 value was empty. | |
87 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags | |
557 | 88 are removed. When adding a flag that was already |
89 present the option value doesn't change. | |
809 | 90 Also see |:set-args| above. |
7 | 91 {not in Vi} |
92 | |
93 :se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=* | |
94 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend | |
95 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
96 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
97 value was empty. | |
98 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
99 {not in Vi} | |
100 | |
101 :se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=* | |
102 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove | |
103 the {value} from a string option, if it is there. | |
104 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there | |
105 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma | |
106 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option | |
107 becomes empty. | |
108 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be | |
109 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags | |
110 one by one to avoid problems. | |
111 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
112 {not in Vi} | |
113 | |
114 The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: > | |
115 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3 | |
116 If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given | |
117 and the following arguments will be ignored. | |
118 | |
119 *:set-verbose* | |
120 When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it | |
121 was last set. Example: > | |
122 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent? | |
1621 | 123 < shiftwidth=4 ~ |
124 Last set from modeline ~ | |
125 cindent ~ | |
126 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim ~ | |
127 This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose | |
128 set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument. | |
129 When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. | |
7 | 130 When the option was set while executing a function, user command or |
131 autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported. | |
132 Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting | |
133 'compatible'. | |
1621 | 134 A few special texts: |
135 Last set from modeline ~ | |
136 Option was set in a |modeline|. | |
137 Last set from --cmd argument ~ | |
138 Option was set with command line argument |--cmd| or +. | |
139 Last set from -c argument ~ | |
140 Option was set with command line argument |-c|, +, |-S| or | |
141 |-q|. | |
142 Last set from environment variable ~ | |
143 Option was set from an environment variable, $VIMINIT, | |
144 $GVIMINIT or $EXINIT. | |
145 Last set from error handler ~ | |
146 Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error. | |
147 | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
148 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature} |
7 | 149 |
150 *:set-termcap* *E522* | |
667 | 151 For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option. This will |
7 | 152 override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If |
153 the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: > | |
154 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot | |
155 This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For | |
156 example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: > | |
157 :set <M-b>=^[b | |
158 (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it) | |
159 The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations. | |
160 | |
2726 | 161 You can define any key codes, e.g.: > |
162 :set t_xy=^[foo; | |
163 There is no warning for using a name that isn't recognized. You can map these | |
164 codes as you like: > | |
165 :map <t_xy> something | |
166 < *E846* | |
167 When a key code is not set, it's like it does not exist. Trying to get its | |
168 value will result in an error: > | |
169 :set t_kb= | |
170 :set t_kb | |
171 E846: Key code not set: t_kb | |
172 | |
36 | 173 The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
174 security reasons. | |
175 | |
7 | 176 The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put |
10 | 177 at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of |
7 | 178 "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the |
179 |more-prompt|. | |
180 | |
181 *option-backslash* | |
182 To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a | |
183 backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this | |
184 means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded | |
185 down). | |
186 A few examples: > | |
187 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags" | |
188 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file" | |
189 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file" | |
190 | |
10 | 191 The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To |
192 include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the | |
7 | 193 'titlestring' option to "hi|there": > |
194 :set titlestring=hi\|there | |
195 This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": > | |
196 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there | |
197 | |
642 | 198 Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment. To include the '"' in |
199 the option value, use '\"' instead. This example sets the 'titlestring' | |
200 option to 'hi "there"': > | |
201 :set titlestring=hi\ \"there\" | |
202 | |
10 | 203 For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More |
7 | 204 precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment |
205 variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not | |
206 removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma, | |
207 etc.) is used like explained above. | |
208 There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": > | |
209 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
210 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
211 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!) | |
212 For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes | |
213 are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be | |
10 | 214 halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a |
7 | 215 result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it. |
216 | |
217 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags* | |
218 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552* | |
219 Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an | |
220 option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: > | |
221 :set guioptions+=a | |
222 Remove a flag from an option like this: > | |
223 :set guioptions-=a | |
224 This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'. | |
10 | 225 Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has |
7 | 226 the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba" |
227 doesn't appear. | |
228 | |
229 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var* | |
22 | 230 Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the |
7 | 231 environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable |
232 name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name | |
233 are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may | |
234 follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is | |
235 appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: > | |
236 :set term=$TERM.new | |
237 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,. | |
238 When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set | |
239 opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing. | |
240 | |
241 | |
242 Handling of local options *local-options* | |
243 | |
244 Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer | |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
245 has its own copy of this option, thus each can have its own value. This |
7 | 246 allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set |
247 'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another. | |
248 | |
249 The following explains what happens to these local options in specific | |
250 situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses | |
251 the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user | |
252 expects is a bit complicated... | |
253 | |
254 When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus | |
255 right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same. | |
256 | |
257 When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since | |
258 the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer, | |
259 these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a | |
260 global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and | |
261 global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed, | |
262 thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer. | |
263 | |
9852
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
264 When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the options from the window |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
265 that was last closed are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
266 window, the values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
267 last closed window where the buffer was edited last are used. |
7 | 268 |
269 It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer. | |
270 When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep | |
271 using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the | |
272 local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window | |
273 has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but | |
274 global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: > | |
275 :e one | |
276 :set list | |
277 :e two | |
278 Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list" | |
279 command you have also set the global value. > | |
280 :set nolist | |
281 :e one | |
282 :setlocal list | |
283 :e two | |
284 Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global | |
285 value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the | |
286 global value. Note that if you do this next: > | |
287 :e one | |
4358 | 288 You will get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited "one". |
289 The options local to a window are remembered for each buffer. This also | |
290 happens when the buffer is not loaded, but they are lost when the buffer is | |
291 wiped out |:bwipe|. | |
7 | 292 |
293 *:setl* *:setlocal* | |
294 :setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the | |
295 current buffer or window. Not all options have a | |
296 local value. If the option does not have a local | |
297 value the global value is set. | |
2413 | 298 With the "all" argument: display local values for all |
299 local options. | |
300 Without argument: Display local values for all local | |
301 options which are different from the default. | |
7 | 302 When displaying a specific local option, show the |
1621 | 303 local value. For a global/local boolean option, when |
304 the global value is being used, "--" is displayed | |
305 before the option name. | |
306 For a global option the global value is | |
7 | 307 shown (but that might change in the future). |
308 {not in Vi} | |
309 | |
809 | 310 :setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by |
311 copying the value. | |
312 {not in Vi} | |
313 | |
3281 | 314 :se[t] {option}< For |global-local| options: Remove the local value of |
315 {option}, so that the global value will be used. | |
7 | 316 {not in Vi} |
317 | |
318 *:setg* *:setglobal* | |
319 :setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local | |
320 option without changing the local value. | |
321 When displaying an option, the global value is shown. | |
2413 | 322 With the "all" argument: display global values for all |
323 local options. | |
324 Without argument: display global values for all local | |
325 options which are different from the default. | |
7 | 326 {not in Vi} |
327 | |
328 For buffer-local and window-local options: | |
329 Command global value local value ~ | |
330 :set option=value set set | |
331 :setlocal option=value - set | |
332 :setglobal option=value set - | |
333 :set option? - display | |
334 :setlocal option? - display | |
335 :setglobal option? display - | |
336 | |
337 | |
338 Global options with a local value *global-local* | |
339 | |
40 | 340 Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows. |
341 For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. | |
342 You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then | |
343 use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global | |
344 value. | |
7 | 345 |
346 For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global | |
347 'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: > | |
348 :set makeprg=gmake | |
349 then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set | |
350 the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too. | |
351 However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use | |
1152 | 352 another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source |
10 | 353 files. You use this command: > |
7 | 354 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake |
355 You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: > | |
356 :setlocal makeprg= | |
357 This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the | |
358 "<" flag, like this: > | |
359 :setlocal autoread< | |
360 Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the | |
361 local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters | |
809 | 362 when the global value changes later). You can also use: > |
363 :set path< | |
364 This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is | |
365 used. Thus it does the same as: > | |
366 :setlocal path= | |
7 | 367 Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using |
368 ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then. | |
369 | |
370 | |
371 Setting the filetype | |
372 | |
11473 | 373 :setf[iletype] [FALLBACK] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype* |
7 | 374 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if |
375 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands. | |
376 This is short for: > | |
377 :if !did_filetype() | |
378 : setlocal filetype={filetype} | |
379 :endif | |
380 < This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid | |
381 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different | |
382 settings and syntax files to be loaded. | |
11473 | 383 |
384 When the optional FALLBACK argument is present, a | |
385 later :setfiletype command will override the | |
386 'filetype'. This is to used for filetype detections | |
387 that are just a guess. |did_filetype()| will return | |
388 false after this command. | |
389 | |
7 | 390 {not in Vi} |
391 | |
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
392 *option-window* *optwin* |
7 | 393 :bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options* |
394 :opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options. | |
395 Options are grouped by function. | |
396 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the | |
397 short help to open a help window with more help for | |
398 the option. | |
399 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the | |
400 "set" line to set the new value. For window and | |
401 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is | |
402 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help | |
403 window, in which case the window below help window is | |
404 used (skipping the option-window). | |
13437 | 405 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
406 feature} | |
7 | 407 |
408 *$HOME* | |
409 Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an | |
410 option and after a space or comma. | |
411 | |
412 On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory | |
413 of user "user". Example: > | |
414 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,. | |
415 | |
416 On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can | |
417 contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the | |
418 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'. | |
419 | |
12254 | 420 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set" |
421 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let". | |
422 | |
423 *$HOME-windows* | |
3224 | 424 On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then |
425 at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH. | |
12499 | 426 If $HOMEDRIVE is not set then $USERPROFILE is used. |
427 | |
428 This expanded value is not exported to the environment, this matters when | |
429 running an external command: > | |
430 :echo system('set | findstr ^HOME=') | |
431 and > | |
432 :echo luaeval('os.getenv("HOME")') | |
433 should echo nothing (an empty string) despite exists('$HOME') being true. | |
434 When setting $HOME to a non-empty string it will be exported to the | |
435 subprocesses. | |
3224 | 436 |
7 | 437 |
438 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on | |
439 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. | |
440 | |
441 *:fix* *:fixdel* | |
442 :fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD': | |
443 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~ | |
444 CTRL-? CTRL-H | |
445 not CTRL-? CTRL-? | |
446 | |
447 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi} | |
448 | |
449 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the | |
450 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in | |
451 your .vimrc: > | |
452 :fixdel | |
453 < This works no matter what the actual code for | |
454 backspace is. | |
455 | |
456 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can | |
457 use this: > | |
458 :if &term == "termname" | |
459 : set t_kb=^V<BS> | |
460 : fixdel | |
461 :endif | |
462 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key | |
10 | 463 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname" |
7 | 464 with your terminal name. |
465 | |
466 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not | |
467 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: > | |
468 :if &term == "termname" | |
469 : set t_kD=^V<Delete> | |
470 :endif | |
471 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key | |
472 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname" | |
473 with your terminal name. | |
474 | |
475 *Linux-backspace* | |
476 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key | |
477 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by | |
478 putting this line in your rc.local: > | |
479 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys | |
480 < | |
481 *NetBSD-backspace* | |
482 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce | |
483 the right code, try this: > | |
484 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace" | |
485 < If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: > | |
486 keysym 22 = BackSpace | |
487 < You need to restart for this to take effect. | |
488 | |
489 ============================================================================== | |
490 2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting* | |
491 | |
492 Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives | |
493 to set options automatically for one or more files: | |
494 | |
495 1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See | |
496 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions, | |
497 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started. | |
498 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and | |
499 |:mksession|. | |
500 2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed. | |
501 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and | |
502 many other things. See |autocommand|. | |
503 3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a | |
504 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for | |
505 modelines. This is explained here. | |
506 | |
507 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520* | |
508 There are two forms of modelines. The first form: | |
5055 | 509 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options} |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
510 |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
511 [text] any text or empty |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
512 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) |
5055 | 513 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:" |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
514 [white] optional white space |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
515 {options} a list of option settings, separated with white space |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
516 or ':', where each part between ':' is the argument |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
517 for a ":set" command (can be empty) |
7 | 518 |
5055 | 519 Examples: |
782 | 520 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~ |
5055 | 521 vim: tw=77 ~ |
7 | 522 |
523 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi): | |
524 | |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
525 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text] |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
526 |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
527 [text] any text or empty |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
528 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
529 {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:", "Vim:" or "ex:" |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
530 [white] optional white space |
5055 | 531 se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space); When |
532 "Vim" is used it must be "set". | |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
533 {options} a list of options, separated with white space, which |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
534 is the argument for a ":set" command |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
535 : a colon |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
536 [text] any text or empty |
7 | 537 |
5055 | 538 Examples: |
782 | 539 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ |
5055 | 540 /* Vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ |
7 | 541 |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
542 The white space before {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
543 chance that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
544 "vi:" and "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
545 version 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
546 could be short for "example:"). |
7 | 547 |
548 *modeline-local* | |
549 The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the | |
11 | 550 buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global |
551 options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and | |
552 the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result | |
553 depends on which one was opened last. | |
7 | 554 |
23 | 555 When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options |
556 from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local | |
557 option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer | |
558 in another window. But window-local options will be set. | |
559 | |
7 | 560 *modeline-version* |
561 If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version | |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
562 number can be specified where "vim:" or "Vim:" is used: |
7 | 563 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later |
564 vim<{vers}: version before {vers} | |
565 vim={vers}: version {vers} | |
566 vim>{vers}: version after {vers} | |
6647 | 567 {vers} is 700 for Vim 7.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor). |
568 For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 7.0: | |
569 /* vim700: set foldmethod=marker */ ~ | |
570 To use a modeline for Vim after version 7.2: | |
571 /* vim>702: set cole=2: */ ~ | |
7 | 572 There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":". |
573 | |
574 | |
575 The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option. | |
576 If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked. | |
577 | |
578 Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line | |
782 | 579 like: |
580 /* vi:ts=4: */ ~ | |
581 will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: | |
582 /* vi:set ts=4: */ ~ | |
7 | 583 |
584 If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped. | |
585 | |
586 If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The | |
782 | 587 backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: |
588 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */ ~ | |
7 | 589 This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the |
590 ':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:". | |
591 | |
592 No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody | |
1111 | 593 might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines). And not all options |
594 can be set. For some options a flag is set, so that when it's used the | |
1152 | 595 |sandbox| is effective. Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline |
1111 | 596 causes trouble. E.g., when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines |
597 are wrapped unexpectedly. So disable modelines before editing untrusted text. | |
598 The mail ftplugin does this, for example. | |
7 | 599 |
600 Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could | |
601 define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For | |
602 example: > | |
603 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif | |
604 And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing | |
605 "VAR". | |
606 | |
607 ============================================================================== | |
608 3. Options summary *option-summary* | |
609 | |
610 In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with | |
611 an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used. | |
612 | |
613 In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option" | |
614 is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used. | |
615 | |
616 For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is | |
617 used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when | |
618 'compatible' is set. | |
619 | |
620 Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that | |
10 | 621 are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a |
7 | 622 different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in |
623 one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view | |
624 at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain | |
625 file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example | |
626 the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C | |
627 program. | |
628 | |
629 global one option for all buffers and windows | |
630 local to window each window has its own copy of this option | |
631 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option | |
632 | |
633 When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window | |
634 are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the | |
635 buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the | |
636 'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for | |
637 buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is | |
10 | 638 first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer |
639 is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not | |
7 | 640 present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the |
641 buffer is created. | |
642 | |
519 | 643 Hidden options *hidden-options* |
644 | |
645 Not all options are supported in all versions. This depends on the supported | |
646 features and sometimes on the system. A remark about this is in curly braces | |
647 below. When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an | |
648 error, this is called a hidden option. You can't get the value of a hidden | |
649 option though, it is not stored. | |
650 | |
651 To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this: > | |
652 if exists('&foo') | |
653 This also returns true for a hidden option. To test if option "foo" is really | |
654 supported use something like this: > | |
655 if exists('+foo') | |
656 < | |
7 | 657 *E355* |
658 A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. | |
659 | |
660 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph* | |
661 'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise) | |
662 global | |
663 {not in Vi} | |
664 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
665 feature} | |
666 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The | |
667 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode | |
668 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_) | |
669 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26]. | |
670 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8. | |
671 See |rileft.txt|. | |
672 | |
673 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'* | |
674 'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off) | |
675 global | |
676 {not in Vi} | |
677 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
678 feature} | |
679 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to | |
680 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get | |
681 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See | |
682 'revins'. | |
683 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
684 | |
685 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'* | |
686 'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off) | |
687 global | |
688 {not in Vi} | |
689 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi| | |
690 feature} | |
233 | 691 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles |
7 | 692 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set. |
693 | |
233 | 694 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This |
7 | 695 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right |
696 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left | |
10 | 697 mode). See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 698 |
699 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'* | |
700 'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single") | |
701 global | |
702 {not in Vi} | |
703 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
704 feature} | |
705 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding. | |
706 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class | |
707 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek | |
708 letters, Cyrillic letters). | |
709 | |
710 There are currently two possible values: | |
233 | 711 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is |
7 | 712 expected by most users. |
713 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters. | |
2492
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
714 *E834* *E835* |
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
715 The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars' |
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
716 contains a character that would be double width. |
7 | 717 |
718 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for | |
719 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in | |
720 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro, | |
721 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets, | |
233 | 722 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also |
7 | 723 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text |
233 | 724 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or |
7 | 725 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font |
726 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.), | |
727 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived | |
728 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has | |
729 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP | |
730 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode | |
731 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11). | |
732 | |
4229 | 733 Vim may set this option automatically at startup time when Vim is |
734 compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and if |t_u7| is set to the | |
12499 | 735 escape sequence to request cursor position report. The response can |
736 be found in |v:termu7resp|. | |
4229 | 737 |
7 | 738 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'* |
739 'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off) | |
740 global | |
741 {not in Vi} | |
742 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled | |
743 on Mac OS X} | |
744 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X | |
745 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts, | |
746 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays. | |
747 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set | |
748 to its default (empty string). | |
11160 | 749 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 750 |
751 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'* | |
752 'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off) | |
753 global | |
754 {not in Vi} | |
2152 | 755 {only available when compiled with it, use |
756 exists("+autochdir") to check} | |
438 | 757 When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you |
758 open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window. | |
759 It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened | |
760 or selected. | |
819 | 761 Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work. |
7 | 762 |
763 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'* | |
764 'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off) | |
765 local to window | |
766 {not in Vi} | |
767 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
768 feature} | |
769 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text. | |
770 Setting this option will: | |
771 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
772 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
773 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles | |
774 between typing English and Arabic key mapping. | |
775 - Set the 'delcombine' option | |
776 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text. | |
777 | |
778 Resetting this option will: | |
779 - Reset the 'rightleft' option. | |
780 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value). | |
781 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global | |
3557 | 782 option). |
11160 | 783 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 784 Also see |arabic.txt|. |
785 | |
786 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'* | |
787 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'* | |
788 'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on) | |
789 global | |
790 {not in Vi} | |
791 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
792 feature} | |
793 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character | |
794 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language | |
3893 | 795 take effect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad |
7 | 796 one which encompasses: |
797 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location | |
798 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone). | |
799 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters | |
800 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
801 When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
802 form. |
7 | 803 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for |
804 further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
11160 | 805 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 806 |
807 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'* | |
808 'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off) | |
809 local to buffer | |
810 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR> | |
811 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not | |
812 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type | |
1152 | 813 <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor |
814 to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included | |
815 in 'cpoptions'. | |
10 | 816 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you |
817 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first | |
818 line. | |
7 | 819 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in |
820 a different way. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
821 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
822 restored when 'paste' is reset. |
7 | 823 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing |
824 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the | |
825 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}. | |
826 | |
827 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'* | |
828 'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off) | |
829 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
830 {not in Vi} | |
831 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and | |
832 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again. | |
14298
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
833 When the file has been deleted this is not done, so you have the text |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
834 from before it was deleted. When it appears again then it is read. |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
835 |timestamp| |
7 | 836 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to |
837 using the global value: > | |
838 :set autoread< | |
839 < | |
840 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'* | |
841 'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off) | |
842 global | |
843 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each | |
844 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!, | |
864 | 845 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a :buffer, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, |
7 | 846 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file. |
847 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see | |
848 'autowriteall' for that. | |
849 | |
850 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'* | |
851 'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off) | |
852 global | |
853 {not in Vi} | |
854 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit", | |
855 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window. | |
856 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has | |
857 been set. | |
858 | |
859 *'background'* *'bg'* | |
2826 | 860 'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light", see below) |
7 | 861 global |
862 {not in Vi} | |
863 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a | |
864 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that | |
865 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal. | |
866 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used. | |
867 This will not always be correct. | |
868 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim | |
869 what the background color looks like. For changing the background | |
870 color, see |:hi-normal|. | |
871 | |
872 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for | |
10 | 873 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not |
1621 | 874 change. *g:colors_name* |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
875 When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set) |
7 | 876 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If |
877 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work. | |
878 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
879 be undone. First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed. |
7 | 880 |
881 When setting 'background' to the default value with: > | |
882 :set background& | |
883 < Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly, | |
884 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value. | |
885 | |
12499 | 886 When the |t_RB| option is set, Vim will use it to request the background |
11442 | 887 color from the terminal. If the returned RGB value is dark/light and |
888 'background' is not dark/light, 'background' will be set and the | |
889 screen is redrawn. This may have side effects, make t_BG empty in | |
12499 | 890 your .vimrc if you suspect this problem. The response to |t_RB| can |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
891 be found in |v:termrbgresp|. |
11442 | 892 |
7 | 893 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be |
894 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects | |
895 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to | |
896 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read | |
897 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background | |
898 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by | |
899 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value | |
900 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on"). | |
2826 | 901 |
902 For MS-DOS, Windows and OS/2 the default is "dark". | |
903 For other systems "dark" is used when 'term' is "linux", | |
904 "screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark | |
905 background. Otherwise the default is "light". | |
906 | |
12254 | 907 The |:terminal| command and the |term_start()| function use the |
908 'background' value to decide whether the terminal window will start | |
909 with a white or black background. | |
910 | |
7 | 911 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly |
912 depending on the terminal name. Example: > | |
913 :if &term == "pcterm" | |
914 : set background=dark | |
915 :endif | |
916 < When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups | |
917 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER | |
918 the setting of the 'background' option. | |
919 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file | |
920 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this | |
921 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be | |
922 done with ":syntax on". | |
923 | |
924 *'backspace'* *'bs'* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
925 'backspace' 'bs' string (default "", set to "indent,eol,start" |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
926 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 927 global |
928 {not in Vi} | |
929 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert | |
930 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows | |
931 a way to backspace over something: | |
932 value effect ~ | |
933 indent allow backspacing over autoindent | |
934 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines) | |
935 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U | |
936 stop once at the start of insert. | |
937 | |
938 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used. | |
939 | |
940 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier: | |
941 value effect ~ | |
942 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible) | |
943 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol" | |
944 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start" | |
945 | |
946 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want. | |
947 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. | |
948 | |
949 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'* | |
950 'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off) | |
951 global | |
952 {not in Vi} | |
953 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the | |
954 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the | |
955 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being | |
956 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is | |
957 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both | |
10 | 958 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the |
7 | 959 |backup-table| for more explanations. |
960 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. | |
961 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the | |
962 oldest version of a file. | |
963 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
964 | |
965 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'* | |
966 'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto") | |
6243 | 967 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 968 {not in Vi} |
969 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's | |
970 done. This is a comma separated list of words. | |
971 | |
972 The main values are: | |
973 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one | |
974 "no" rename the file and write a new one | |
975 "auto" one of the previous, what works best | |
976 | |
977 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are: | |
978 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing | |
979 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing | |
980 | |
981 Making a copy and overwriting the original file: | |
982 - Takes extra time to copy the file. | |
983 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or | |
984 has a resource fork, all this is preserved. | |
985 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link, | |
986 not of the real file. | |
987 | |
988 Renaming the file and writing a new one: | |
989 + It's fast. | |
990 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new | |
991 file. | |
992 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link. | |
993 | |
994 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file | |
995 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and | |
1152 | 996 the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected, a |
997 copy will be made. | |
7 | 998 |
999 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in | |
1000 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they | |
1001 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing | |
1002 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to | |
1003 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be | |
1004 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or | |
1005 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not | |
1006 be propagated back to the original source. | |
1007 *crontab* | |
1008 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program | |
1009 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if | |
1010 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the | |
10 | 1011 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an |
7 | 1012 example. |
1013 | |
1014 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled | |
1015 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and | |
1016 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file | |
10 | 1017 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The |
7 | 1018 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this |
1019 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for | |
1020 others. | |
1021 | |
1022 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has | |
1023 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file | |
1024 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic) | |
1025 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't | |
1026 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly | |
1027 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but | |
1028 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will | |
1029 again not rename the file. | |
1030 | |
11160 | 1031 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
1032 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
1033 | |
7 | 1034 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'* |
1035 'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
5555 | 1036 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:/tmp,c:/temp" |
7 | 1037 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/") |
1038 global | |
1039 {not in Vi} | |
1040 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas. | |
1041 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1042 where this is possible. The directory must exist, Vim will not |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1043 create it for you. |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
1044 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is |
7 | 1045 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this. |
1046 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory | |
1047 as the edited file. | |
33 | 1048 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 1049 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The |
1050 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
1051 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning). | |
1052 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part | |
1053 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
1054 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
1055 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
1056 - A directory name may end in an '/'. | |
1057 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
1058 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
1059 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
1060 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
1061 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
1062 of the option is removed. | |
1063 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options. | |
1064 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: > | |
1065 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp | |
1066 < You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your | |
1067 home directory for this to work properly. | |
1068 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
1069 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
1070 uses another default. | |
1071 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1072 security reasons. | |
1073 | |
1074 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589* | |
1075 'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_") | |
1076 global | |
1077 {not in Vi} | |
1078 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the | |
1079 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids | |
1080 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might | |
1081 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with | |
1082 ".bak" that you want to keep. | |
36 | 1083 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 1084 |
26 | 1085 If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre |
1086 autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to | |
1087 include a timestamp. > | |
1088 :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~' | |
1089 < Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory. | |
1090 | |
7 | 1091 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'* |
13664
f64c5e636c9f
patch 8.0.1704: 'backupskip' default doesn't work for Mac
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13482
diff
changeset
|
1092 'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*" |
f64c5e636c9f
patch 8.0.1704: 'backupskip' default doesn't work for Mac
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13482
diff
changeset
|
1093 Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*" |
f64c5e636c9f
patch 8.0.1704: 'backupskip' default doesn't work for Mac
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13482
diff
changeset
|
1094 Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*") |
7 | 1095 global |
1096 {not in Vi} | |
1097 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
1098 feature} | |
1099 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the | |
1100 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both | |
1101 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used. | |
1102 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. | |
1103 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|. | |
1104 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the | |
233 | 1105 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix. |
1152 | 1106 |
3513 | 1107 WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write |
1108 your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you | |
1109 lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only disable | |
1110 backups if you don't care about losing the file. | |
1111 | |
1152 | 1112 Note that environment variables are not expanded. If you want to use |
1113 $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: > | |
8835
c1a5623cfc86
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/7c1c6dbb6817640fd3956a0d5417da23fde336d8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8748
diff
changeset
|
1114 :let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*' |
1152 | 1115 |
1116 < Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a | |
557 | 1117 backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see |
1118 the newly created file). Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|. | |
7 | 1119 |
1120 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'* | |
1121 'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600) | |
1122 global | |
1123 {not in Vi} | |
1124 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1125 feature} | |
1126 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|. | |
1127 | |
1128 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'* | |
1129 'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off) | |
1130 global | |
1131 {not in Vi} | |
1132 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
189 | 1133 feature} |
12865
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1134 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the GUI. |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1135 |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1136 *'balloonevalterm'* *'bevalterm'* *'noballoonevalterm'* |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1137 *'nobevalterm'* |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1138 'balloonevalterm' 'bevalterm' boolean (default off) |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1139 global |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1140 {not in Vi} |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1141 {only available when compiled with the |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1142 |+balloon_eval_term| feature} |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1143 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the terminal. |
7 | 1144 |
189 | 1145 *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'* |
1146 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr' string (default "") | |
790 | 1147 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
189 | 1148 {not in Vi} |
1149 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1150 feature} | |
782 | 1151 Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon. It is only used |
1152 when 'ballooneval' is on. These variables can be used: | |
189 | 1153 |
1154 v:beval_bufnr number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show | |
1155 v:beval_winnr number of the window | |
9227
ecb621205ed1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/82af8710bf8d1caeeceafb1370a052cb7d92f076
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9116
diff
changeset
|
1156 v:beval_winid ID of the window |
189 | 1157 v:beval_lnum line number |
1158 v:beval_col column number (byte index) | |
1159 v:beval_text word under or after the mouse pointer | |
1160 | |
1161 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! | |
1162 Example: > | |
1163 function! MyBalloonExpr() | |
435 | 1164 return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum . |
189 | 1165 \', column ' . v:beval_col . |
1166 \ ' of file ' . bufname(v:beval_bufnr) . | |
1167 \ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"' | |
1168 endfunction | |
1169 set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr() | |
1170 set ballooneval | |
1171 < | |
11062 | 1172 Also see |balloon_show()|, can be used if the content of the balloon |
1173 is to be fetched asynchronously. | |
1174 | |
189 | 1175 NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text |
1176 character. If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty, | |
1177 Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans | |
1178 or Sun Workshop). | |
1179 | |
3682 | 1180 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
1181 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 1182 |
1183 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
1184 evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|. | |
1185 | |
446 | 1186 To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: > |
435 | 1187 if has("balloon_multiline") |
714 | 1188 < When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line. If the |
1189 expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item | |
1190 as a string and putting "\n" in between them. | |
11160 | 1191 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
714 | 1192 |
6949 | 1193 *'belloff'* *'bo'* |
1194 'belloff' 'bo' string (default "") | |
1195 global | |
1196 {not in Vi} | |
1197 Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung. It is a comma | |
1198 separated list of items. For each item that is present, the bell | |
1199 will be silenced. This is most useful to specify specific events in | |
1200 insert mode to be silenced. | |
1201 | |
1202 item meaning when present ~ | |
1203 all All events. | |
1204 backspace When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an | |
1205 error. | |
1206 cursor Fail to move around using the cursor keys or | |
1207 <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|. | |
1208 complete Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or | |
1209 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. | |
1210 copy Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or | |
1211 |i_CTRL-E|. | |
1212 ctrlg Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode. | |
1213 error Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line) | |
1214 (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|). | |
1215 esc hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|. | |
1216 ex In |Visual-mode|, hitting |Q| results in an error. | |
1217 hangul Error occurred when using hangul input. | |
1218 insertmode Pressing <Esc> in 'insertmode'. | |
1219 lang Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL. | |
1220 mess No output available for |g<|. | |
1221 showmatch Error occurred for 'showmatch' function. | |
1222 operator Empty region error |cpo-E|. | |
1223 register Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|. | |
1224 shell Bell from shell output |:!|. | |
1225 spell Error happened on spell suggest. | |
1226 wildmode More matches in |cmdline-completion| available | |
1227 (depends on the 'wildmode' setting). | |
1228 | |
11160 | 1229 This is most useful to fine tune when in Insert mode the bell should |
1230 be rung. For Normal mode and Ex commands, the bell is often rung to | |
6949 | 1231 indicate that an error occurred. It can be silenced by adding the |
1232 "error" keyword. | |
1233 | |
7 | 1234 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'* |
1235 'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off) | |
1236 local to buffer | |
1237 {not in Vi} | |
1238 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also | |
1239 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few | |
1240 options will be changed (also when it already was on): | |
1241 'textwidth' will be set to 0 | |
1242 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0 | |
1243 'modeline' will be off | |
1244 'expandtab' will be off | |
1245 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the | |
1246 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL> | |
1247 separates lines). | |
1248 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the | |
1249 file is read without conversion. | |
1250 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is | |
1251 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g., | |
1252 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set | |
1253 'bin' again when the file has been loaded. | |
1254 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when | |
1255 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of | |
1256 saved option values. | |
1257 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument. | |
1258 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all | |
1259 files you edit. | |
1260 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if | |
1261 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to | |
1262 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See | |
1263 the 'endofline' option. | |
1264 | |
1265 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'* | |
1266 'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on) | |
1267 global | |
1268 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
8246
f16bfe02cef1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f391327adbbffb11180cf6038a92af1ed144e907
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8182
diff
changeset
|
1269 This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported. |
7 | 1270 |
1271 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'* | |
1272 'bomb' boolean (default off) | |
1273 local to buffer | |
1274 {not in Vi} | |
1275 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
1276 feature} | |
1277 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte | |
1278 Order Mark) is prepended to the file: | |
1279 - this option is on | |
1280 - the 'binary' option is off | |
1281 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big | |
1282 endian variants. | |
1283 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file. | |
1284 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it | |
1285 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1286 appear halfway the resulting file. Gcc doesn't accept a BOM. |
7 | 1287 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a |
1288 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly. | |
1289 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you | |
1290 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM | |
1291 will be restored when writing the file. | |
1292 | |
1293 *'breakat'* *'brk'* | |
1294 'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?") | |
1295 global | |
1296 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1297 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 1298 feature} |
1299 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line | |
500 | 1300 break if 'linebreak' is on. Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit |
1301 characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding. | |
7 | 1302 |
8835
c1a5623cfc86
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/7c1c6dbb6817640fd3956a0d5417da23fde336d8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8748
diff
changeset
|
1303 *'breakindent'* *'bri'* *'nobreakindent'* *'nobri'* |
6009 | 1304 'breakindent' 'bri' boolean (default off) |
1305 local to window | |
1306 {not in Vi} | |
1307 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| | |
1308 feature} | |
1309 Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of | |
1310 space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal blocks | |
1311 of text. | |
11160 | 1312 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
6009 | 1313 |
1314 *'breakindentopt'* *'briopt'* | |
1315 'breakindentopt' 'briopt' string (default empty) | |
1316 local to window | |
1317 {not in Vi} | |
1318 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| | |
1319 feature} | |
1320 Settings for 'breakindent'. It can consist of the following optional | |
6026 | 1321 items and must be separated by a comma: |
6009 | 1322 min:{n} Minimum text width that will be kept after |
1323 applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting | |
1324 text should normally be narrower. This prevents | |
1325 text indented almost to the right window border | |
1326 occupying lot of vertical space when broken. | |
6026 | 1327 shift:{n} After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's |
1328 beginning will be shifted by the given number of | |
1329 characters. It permits dynamic French paragraph | |
6009 | 1330 indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line |
1331 continuation (positive). | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
1332 sbr Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the |
6009 | 1333 additional indent. |
1334 The default value for min is 20 and shift is 0. | |
1335 | |
7 | 1336 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'* |
29 | 1337 'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last") |
7 | 1338 global |
1621 | 1339 {not in Vi} {only for Motif, Athena, GTK, Mac and |
1340 Win32 GUI} | |
7 | 1341 Which directory to use for the file browser: |
1621 | 1342 last Use same directory as with last file browser, where a |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
1343 file was opened or saved. |
7 | 1344 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer. |
1345 current Use the current directory. | |
1346 {path} Use the specified directory | |
1347 | |
1348 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'* | |
1349 'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "") | |
1350 local to buffer | |
1351 {not in Vi} | |
1352 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer | |
1353 displayed in a window: | |
1354 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option | |
1355 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden' | |
1356 is not set | |
1357 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using | |
1358 |:hide| | |
1359 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1360 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1361 |:bdelete| | |
1362 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1363 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1364 |:bwipeout| | |
1365 | |
82 | 1366 CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer |
3224 | 1367 are lost without a warning. Also, these values may break autocommands |
1368 that switch between buffers temporarily. | |
7 | 1369 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify |
1370 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1371 | |
1372 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85* | |
1373 'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on) | |
1374 local to buffer | |
1375 {not in Vi} | |
1376 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If | |
1377 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc. | |
1378 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember | |
1379 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer. | |
1380 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer". | |
1381 | |
1382 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382* | |
1383 'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "") | |
1384 local to buffer | |
1385 {not in Vi} | |
1386 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer: | |
1387 <empty> normal buffer | |
1388 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be | |
1389 written | |
1390 nowrite buffer which will not be written | |
17 | 1391 acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd |
13437 | 1392 autocommands. |
7 | 1393 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow| |
648 | 1394 or list of locations |:lwindow| |
7 | 1395 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this |
1396 manually) | |
11757
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
1397 terminal buffer for a |terminal| (you are not supposed to set |
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
1398 this manually) |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
1399 prompt buffer where only the last line can be edited, meant |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
1400 to be used by a plugin, see |prompt-buffer| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
1401 {only when compiled with the |+channel| feature} |
7 | 1402 |
1403 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to | |
1404 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1405 | |
1406 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects! | |
1407 | |
648 | 1408 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location |
1409 list. This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and | |
1410 you are not supposed to change it. | |
7 | 1411 |
1412 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar: | |
1413 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't | |
1414 work (":w filename" does work though). | |
1415 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|. | |
1416 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for | |
1417 example when you quit Vim. | |
1418 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory | |
1419 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap | |
1420 file). | |
1421 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a | |
1422 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd| | |
1423 command. | |
6647 | 1424 both: When using ":e bufname" and already editing "bufname" |
1425 the buffer is made empty and autocommands are | |
1426 triggered as usual for |:edit|. | |
17 | 1427 *E676* |
1428 "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like | |
1429 "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and | |
1430 "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned | |
1431 without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|, | |
1432 |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands. | |
7 | 1433 |
1434 *'casemap'* *'cmp'* | |
1435 'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii") | |
1436 global | |
1437 {not in Vi} | |
804 | 1438 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
1439 feature} | |
7 | 1440 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain |
1441 these words, separated by a comma: | |
1442 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current | |
1443 locale does not change the case mapping. This only | |
493 | 1444 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding, |
1445 "latin1" or "iso-8859-15". When "internal" is | |
1446 omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library | |
1447 functions are used when available. | |
7 | 1448 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US |
1449 case mapping, the current locale is not effective. | |
1450 This probably only matters for Turkish. | |
1451 | |
1452 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346* | |
1453 'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,") | |
1454 global | |
1455 {not in Vi} | |
1456 {not available when compiled without the | |
1457 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
1458 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1459 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched | |
1668 | 1460 for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with "/", "./" |
1461 or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then. | |
7 | 1462 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as |
1463 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|. | |
1464 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look | |
1465 in the current directory first. | |
1466 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include | |
1467 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to | |
1468 override it: > | |
1469 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g') | |
1470 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1471 security reasons. | |
1472 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names). | |
1473 | |
1474 *'cedit'* | |
1475 'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F) | |
1476 global | |
1477 {not in Vi} | |
1478 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1479 feature} | |
1480 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window. | |
1481 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off. | |
1482 Only non-printable keys are allowed. | |
1483 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to | |
1484 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: > | |
9407
619a98a67f67
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e18dbe865d190e74fb5d43ac8bc6ac22507d0223
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9344
diff
changeset
|
1485 :exe "set cedit=\<C-Y>" |
619a98a67f67
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e18dbe865d190e74fb5d43ac8bc6ac22507d0223
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9344
diff
changeset
|
1486 :exe "set cedit=\<Esc>" |
7 | 1487 < |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character. |
1488 See |cmdwin|. | |
11160 | 1489 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
1490 is reset. | |
7 | 1491 |
1492 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513* | |
1493 'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "") | |
1494 global | |
1495 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1496 and |+eval| features} |
7 | 1497 {not in Vi} |
1498 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is | |
1499 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a | |
1500 different encoding from what is desired. | |
1501 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is | |
1502 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is | |
1503 preferred, because it is much faster. | |
1504 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no | |
1505 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first. | |
1506 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success, | |
1507 non-zero for failure. | |
1508 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'. | |
1509 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are | |
1510 used. | |
1511 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8" | |
1512 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this. | |
1513 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c' | |
1514 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion. | |
1515 Example: > | |
1516 set charconvert=CharConvert() | |
1517 fun CharConvert() | |
1518 system("recode " | |
1519 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to | |
1520 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out) | |
1521 return v:shell_error | |
1522 endfun | |
1523 < The related Vim variables are: | |
1524 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding | |
1525 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding | |
1526 v:fname_in name of the input file | |
1527 v:fname_out name of the output file | |
1528 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same. | |
1529 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different | |
1530 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4. | |
1531 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want | |
1532 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care | |
1533 of this. | |
1534 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1535 security reasons. | |
1536 | |
1537 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'* | |
1538 'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off) | |
1539 local to buffer | |
1540 {not in Vi} | |
1541 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1542 feature} | |
1621 | 1543 Enables automatic C program indenting. See 'cinkeys' to set the keys |
7 | 1544 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your |
1545 preferred indent style. | |
1546 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'. | |
1547 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty, | |
1548 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an | |
1549 external program. | |
1550 See |C-indenting|. | |
1551 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent' | |
1552 option or 'indentexpr'. | |
1553 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
1554 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
1555 | |
1556 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'* | |
1557 'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
1558 local to buffer | |
1559 {not in Vi} | |
1560 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1561 feature} | |
1562 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
1563 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is | |
1564 empty. | |
1565 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|. | |
1566 See |C-indenting|. | |
1567 | |
1568 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'* | |
1569 'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "") | |
1570 local to buffer | |
1571 {not in Vi} | |
1572 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1573 feature} | |
1574 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C | |
1575 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and | |
1576 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general. | |
1577 | |
1578 | |
1579 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'* | |
1580 'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch") | |
1581 local to buffer | |
1582 {not in Vi} | |
1583 {not available when compiled without both the | |
1584 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features} | |
1585 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when | |
1586 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at | |
1587 an appropriate place (inside {}). | |
1588 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't | |
1589 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase: | |
1590 "if,If,IF". | |
1591 | |
1592 *'clipboard'* *'cb'* | |
1593 'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux" | |
1594 for X-windows, "" otherwise) | |
1595 global | |
1596 {not in Vi} | |
1597 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard| | |
1598 feature is included} | |
1599 This option is a list of comma separated names. | |
1600 These names are recognized: | |
1601 | |
3674 | 1602 *clipboard-unnamed* |
7 | 1603 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*' |
1604 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which | |
1605 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a | |
1606 register is explicitly specified, it will always be | |
1607 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard' | |
1608 or not. The clipboard register can always be | |
1609 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see | |
1610 |gui-clipboard|. | |
1611 | |
3682 | 1612 *clipboard-unnamedplus* |
4119 | 1613 unnamedplus A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the |
1614 clipboard register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of | |
1615 register '*' for all yank, delete, change and put | |
1616 operations which would normally go to the unnamed | |
1617 register. When "unnamed" is also included to the | |
1618 option, yank operations (but not delete, change or | |
1619 put) will additionally copy the text into register | |
1620 '*'. | |
2662 | 1621 Only available with the |+X11| feature. |
2654 | 1622 Availability can be checked with: > |
1623 if has('unnamedplus') | |
1624 < | |
3682 | 1625 *clipboard-autoselect* |
7 | 1626 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present, |
1627 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual | |
1628 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the | |
1629 windowing system's global selection or put the | |
1630 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection | |
1631 register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for | |
1632 details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in | |
1633 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this | |
1634 "autoselect" flag is used. | |
1635 Also applies to the modeless selection. | |
1636 | |
3674 | 1637 *clipboard-autoselectplus* |
1638 autoselectplus Like "autoselect" but using the + register instead of | |
1639 the * register. Compare to the 'P' flag in | |
1640 'guioptions'. | |
1641 | |
1642 *clipboard-autoselectml* | |
7 | 1643 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection |
1644 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
1645 | |
3674 | 1646 *clipboard-html* |
1904 | 1647 html When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when |
1648 pasting. When putting text on the clipboard, mark it | |
1649 as HTML. This works to copy rendered HTML from | |
1650 Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML | |
1651 in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox. | |
2240
6b4879aea261
Add test for gettabvar() and settabvar().
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2220
diff
changeset
|
1652 You probably want to add this only temporarily, |
6b4879aea261
Add test for gettabvar() and settabvar().
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2220
diff
changeset
|
1653 possibly use BufEnter autocommands. |
1904 | 1654 Only supported for GTK version 2 and later. |
1655 Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature. | |
1656 | |
3674 | 1657 *clipboard-exclude* |
7 | 1658 exclude:{pattern} |
1659 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of | |
1660 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no | |
1661 connection will be made to the X server. This is | |
1662 useful in this situation: | |
1663 - Running Vim in a console. | |
1664 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another | |
1665 display. | |
1666 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the | |
1667 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator. | |
1668 To never connect to the X server use: > | |
1669 exclude:.* | |
1670 < This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument. | |
1671 Note that when there is no connection to the X server | |
1672 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard | |
1673 cannot be accessed. | |
1674 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is | |
1675 interpreted as if 'magic' was on. | |
1676 The rest of the option value will be used for | |
1677 {pattern}, this must be the last entry. | |
1678 | |
1679 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'* | |
1680 'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1) | |
1681 global | |
1682 {not in Vi} | |
1683 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding | |
1684 |hit-enter| prompts. | |
824 | 1685 The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab |
1686 page can have a different value. | |
7 | 1687 |
1688 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'* | |
1689 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7) | |
1690 global | |
1691 {not in Vi} | |
1692 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1693 feature} | |
1694 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin| | |
1695 | |
2608
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1696 *'colorcolumn'* *'cc'* |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1697 'colorcolumn' 'cc' string (default "") |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1698 local to window |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1699 {not in Vi} |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1700 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1701 feature} |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1702 'colorcolumn' is a comma separated list of screen columns that are |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1703 highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|. Useful to align |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1704 text. Will make screen redrawing slower. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1705 The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1706 '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. > |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1707 |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1708 :set cc=+1 " highlight column after 'textwidth' |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1709 :set cc=+1,+2,+3 " highlight three columns after 'textwidth' |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1710 :hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1711 < |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1712 When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1713 A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1714 |
7 | 1715 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594* |
1716 'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width) | |
1717 global | |
1718 {not in Vi} | |
1719 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal | |
161 | 1720 initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see |
1721 |posix-screen-size|. | |
7 | 1722 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
1723 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
1724 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
1725 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical | |
1152 | 1726 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up. For |
1727 the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to | |
1728 what fits on the screen. You can use this command to get the widest | |
1729 window possible: > | |
1730 :set columns=9999 | |
1731 < Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000. | |
7 | 1732 |
1733 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525* | |
1734 'comments' 'com' string (default | |
1735 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-") | |
1736 local to buffer | |
1737 {not in Vi} | |
1738 {not available when compiled without the |+comments| | |
1739 feature} | |
1740 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See | |
1741 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to | |
1742 insert a space. | |
1743 | |
1744 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537* | |
1745 'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/") | |
1746 local to buffer | |
1747 {not in Vi} | |
1748 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
1749 feature} | |
1750 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the | |
1751 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see | |
1752 |fold-marker|. | |
1753 | |
1754 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'* | |
819 | 1755 'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
1756 file is found, reset in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 1757 global |
1758 {not in Vi} | |
1759 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or | |
1760 make Vim behave in a more useful way. | |
11062 | 1761 |
7 | 1762 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset, |
11062 | 1763 other options are also changed as a side effect. |
1764 NOTE: Setting or resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected | |
1765 effects: Mappings are interpreted in another way, undo behaves | |
1766 differently, etc. If you set this option in your vimrc file, you | |
1767 should probably put it at the very start. | |
1768 | |
7 | 1769 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the |
1770 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim | |
1771 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible' | |
1772 option. | |
819 | 1773 When a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found while Vim is starting up, |
378 | 1774 this option is switched off, and all options that have not been |
1775 modified will be set to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means | |
819 | 1776 that when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file exists, Vim will use the Vim |
378 | 1777 defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't |
1152 | 1778 happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file, nor for a file given |
1779 with the |-u| argument). Also see |compatible-default| and | |
1780 |posix-compliance|. | |
7 | 1781 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with |
1782 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|. | |
11062 | 1783 See 'cpoptions' for more fine tuning of Vi compatibility. |
1784 | |
1785 When this option is set, numerous other options are set to make Vim as | |
1786 Vi-compatible as possible. When this option is unset, various options | |
1787 are set to make Vim more useful. The table below lists all the | |
1788 options affected. | |
1789 The {?} column indicates when the options are affected: | |
1790 + Means that the option is set to the value given in {set value} when | |
1791 'compatible' is set. | |
1792 & Means that the option is set to the value given in {set value} when | |
1793 'compatible' is set AND is set to its Vim default value when | |
1794 'compatible' is unset. | |
1795 - Means the option is NOT changed when setting 'compatible' but IS | |
1796 set to its Vim default when 'compatible' is unset. | |
1797 The {effect} column summarises the change when 'compatible' is set. | |
1798 | |
11160 | 1799 option ? set value effect ~ |
11062 | 1800 |
1801 'allowrevins' + off no CTRL-_ command | |
1802 'antialias' + off don't use antialiased fonts | |
1803 'arabic' + off reset arabic-related options | |
1804 'arabicshape' + on correct character shapes | |
1805 'backspace' + "" normal backspace | |
1806 'backup' + off no backup file | |
1807 'backupcopy' & Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy | |
1808 else: "auto" copy or rename backup file | |
1809 'balloonexpr' + "" text to show in evaluation balloon | |
1810 'breakindent' + off don't indent when wrapping lines | |
1811 'cedit' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1812 'cindent' + off no C code indentation | |
1813 'compatible' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1814 'copyindent' + off don't copy indent structure | |
1815 'cpoptions' & (all flags) Vi-compatible flags | |
1816 'cscopepathcomp'+ 0 don't show directories in tags list | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
1817 'cscoperelative'+ off don't use basename of path as prefix |
11062 | 1818 'cscopetag' + off don't use cscope for ":tag" |
11160 | 1819 'cscopetagorder'+ 0 see |cscopetagorder| |
11062 | 1820 'cscopeverbose' + off see |cscopeverbose| |
1821 'delcombine' + off unicode: delete whole char combination | |
1822 'digraph' + off no digraphs | |
1823 'esckeys' & off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode | |
1824 'expandtab' + off tabs not expanded to spaces | |
1825 'fileformats' & "" no automatic file format detection, | |
7 | 1826 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2 |
11062 | 1827 'formatexpr' + "" use 'formatprg' for auto-formatting |
1828 'formatoptions' & "vt" Vi compatible formatting | |
1829 'gdefault' + off no default 'g' flag for ":s" | |
1830 'history' & 0 no commandline history | |
1831 'hkmap' + off no Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1832 'hkmapp' + off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1833 'hlsearch' + off no highlighting of search matches | |
1834 'incsearch' + off no incremental searching | |
1835 'indentexpr' + "" no indenting by expression | |
1836 'insertmode' + off do not start in Insert mode | |
1837 'iskeyword' & "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric | |
7 | 1838 characters and '_' |
11062 | 1839 'joinspaces' + on insert 2 spaces after period |
1840 'modeline' & off no modelines | |
1841 'more' & off no pauses in listings | |
1842 'mzquantum' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1843 'numberwidth' & 8 min number of columns for line number | |
1844 'preserveindent'+ off don't preserve current indent structure | |
1845 when changing it | |
1846 'revins' + off no reverse insert | |
1847 'ruler' + off no ruler | |
1848 'scrolljump' + 1 no jump scroll | |
1849 'scrolloff' + 0 no scroll offset | |
1850 'shelltemp' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1851 'shiftround' + off indent not rounded to shiftwidth | |
1852 'shortmess' & "" no shortening of messages | |
1853 'showcmd' & off command characters not shown | |
1854 'showmode' & off current mode not shown | |
1855 'sidescrolloff' + 0 cursor moves to edge of screen in scroll | |
1856 'smartcase' + off no automatic ignore case switch | |
1857 'smartindent' + off no smart indentation | |
1858 'smarttab' + off no smart tab size | |
1859 'softtabstop' + 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions | |
1860 'startofline' + on goto startofline with some commands | |
1861 'tagcase' & "followic" 'ignorecase' when searching tags file | |
1862 'tagrelative' & off tag file names are not relative | |
1863 'termguicolors' + off don't use highlight-(guifg|guibg) | |
1864 'textauto' & off no automatic textmode detection | |
1865 'textwidth' + 0 no automatic line wrap | |
1866 'tildeop' + off tilde is not an operator | |
1867 'ttimeout' + off no terminal timeout | |
1868 'undofile' + off don't use an undo file | |
11160 | 1869 'viminfo' - {unchanged} {set Vim default only on resetting 'cp'} |
11062 | 1870 'virtualedit' + "" cursor can only be placed on characters |
1871 'whichwrap' & "" left-right movements don't wrap | |
1872 'wildchar' & CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab> | |
7 | 1873 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion |
11062 | 1874 'writebackup' + on or off depends on the |+writebackup| feature |
7 | 1875 |
1876 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535* | |
1877 'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i") | |
1878 local to buffer | |
1879 {not in Vi} | |
1880 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works | |
1881 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line | |
1882 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion | |
1883 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags: | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
1884 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored) |
7 | 1885 w scan buffers from other windows |
1886 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1887 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1888 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list | |
1889 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option | |
703 | 1890 kspell use the currently active spell checking |spell| |
7 | 1891 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given, |
1892 patterns are valid too. For example: > | |
1893 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish | |
1894 < s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option | |
1895 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns | |
1896 are valid too. | |
1897 i scan current and included files | |
1898 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro | |
1899 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D| | |
1900 ] tag completion | |
1901 t same as "]" | |
1902 | |
1903 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are | |
1904 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files | |
1905 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for | |
1906 whole-line completion. | |
1907 | |
1908 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan: | |
1909 1. the current buffer | |
1910 2. buffers in other windows | |
1911 3. other loaded buffers | |
1912 4. unloaded buffers | |
1913 5. tags | |
1914 6. included files | |
1915 | |
1916 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'- | |
233 | 1917 based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns |
1918 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions). | |
7 | 1919 |
12 | 1920 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'* |
1921 'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty) | |
1922 local to buffer | |
1923 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1924 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1925 or |+insert_expand| features} |
623 | 1926 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion |
1927 with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U| | |
648 | 1928 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
1929 invoked and what it should return. | |
2642 | 1930 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
1931 security reasons. | |
14 | 1932 |
540 | 1933 *'completeopt'* *'cot'* |
730 | 1934 'completeopt' 'cot' string (default: "menu,preview") |
540 | 1935 global |
766 | 1936 {not available when compiled without the |
1937 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
540 | 1938 {not in Vi} |
665 | 1939 A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion |
1940 |ins-completion|. The supported values are: | |
540 | 1941 |
1942 menu Use a popup menu to show the possible completions. The | |
1943 menu is only shown when there is more than one match and | |
1944 sufficient colors are available. |ins-completion-menu| | |
1945 | |
707 | 1946 menuone Use the popup menu also when there is only one match. |
856 | 1947 Useful when there is additional information about the |
707 | 1948 match, e.g., what file it comes from. |
1949 | |
836 | 1950 longest Only insert the longest common text of the matches. If |
1951 the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more | |
1952 characters. Whether case is ignored depends on the kind | |
1953 of completion. For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is | |
1954 used. | |
665 | 1955 |
730 | 1956 preview Show extra information about the currently selected |
1152 | 1957 completion in the preview window. Only works in |
1958 combination with "menu" or "menuone". | |
1959 | |
6911 | 1960 noinsert Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects |
1961 a match from the menu. Only works in combination with | |
1962 "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present. | |
1963 | |
1964 noselect Do not select a match in the menu, force the user to | |
1965 select one from the menu. Only works in combination with | |
1966 "menu" or "menuone". | |
1967 | |
730 | 1968 |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1969 *'concealcursor'* *'cocu'* |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1970 'concealcursor' 'cocu' string (default: "") |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1971 local to window |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1972 {not in Vi} |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1973 {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1974 feature} |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1975 Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed. |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1976 When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1977 other lines. |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1978 n Normal mode |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1979 v Visual mode |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1980 i Insert mode |
2382
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1981 c Command line editing, for 'incsearch' |
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1982 |
2400
e6f1424dd66a
Let 'v' flag in 'concealcursor' apply to all lines in the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2394
diff
changeset
|
1983 'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor. |
2382
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1984 A useful value is "nc". This is used in help files. So long as you |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1985 are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1986 or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1987 you can see what you are doing. |
2380
b47748aa3236
Don't conceal text in lines inside the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
1988 Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's |
b47748aa3236
Don't conceal text in lines inside the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
1989 displayed. E.g., when moving vertically it may change column. |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1990 |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1991 |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1992 'conceallevel' 'cole' *'conceallevel'* *'cole'* |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1993 number (default 0) |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1994 local to window |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1995 {not in Vi} |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1996 {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1997 feature} |
2340
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1998 Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal| |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1999 is shown: |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
2000 |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
2001 Value Effect ~ |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2002 0 Text is shown normally |
2426 | 2003 1 Each block of concealed text is replaced with one |
2004 character. If the syntax item does not have a custom | |
2005 replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the | |
2006 character defined in 'listchars' is used (default is a | |
2007 space). | |
2008 It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group. | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2009 2 Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2010 custom replacement character defined (see |
2426 | 2011 |:syn-cchar|). |
2349
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
2012 3 Concealed text is completely hidden. |
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
2013 |
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
2014 Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
2015 edit and copy the text. This can be changed with the 'concealcursor' |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
2016 option. |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2017 |
7 | 2018 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'* |
2019 'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off) | |
2020 global | |
2021 {not in Vi} | |
2022 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally | |
2023 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e", | |
2024 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current | |
2025 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer. | |
2026 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one | |
2027 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm| | |
2028 command. | |
2029 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
2030 | |
2031 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'* | |
2032 'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off) | |
2033 global | |
2034 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
8246
f16bfe02cef1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f391327adbbffb11180cf6038a92af1ed144e907
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8182
diff
changeset
|
2035 This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported. |
7 | 2036 |
2037 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'* | |
2038 'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off) | |
2039 local to buffer | |
2040 {not in Vi} | |
2041 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a | |
2042 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of | |
2043 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled, | |
2044 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the | |
2045 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the | |
1621 | 2046 existing line. 'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab |
2047 remains a Tab. If the new indent is greater than on the existing | |
7 | 2048 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner. |
11160 | 2049 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 2050 Also see 'preserveindent'. |
2051 | |
8148
f5da459c5698
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e0fa3742ead676a3074a10edadbc955e1a89153d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8061
diff
changeset
|
2052 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'* *cpo* |
7 | 2053 'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs", |
2054 Vi default: all flags) | |
2055 global | |
2056 {not in Vi} | |
2057 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present | |
5340 | 2058 this indicates Vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where |
2059 not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred. | |
7 | 2060 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options". |
2061 Commas can be added for readability. | |
2062 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
2063 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
2064 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2065 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
164 | 2066 NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when |
2067 the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2068 variable exists |posix|. This means Vim tries to behave like the |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2069 POSIX specification. |
7 | 2070 |
2071 contains behavior ~ | |
2072 *cpo-a* | |
2073 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
2074 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
2075 current window. | |
2076 *cpo-A* | |
2077 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
2078 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
2079 current window. | |
2080 *cpo-b* | |
2081 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of | |
2082 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping, | |
2083 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next | |
2084 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to | |
2085 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all | |
2086 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands. | |
2087 See also |map_bar|. | |
2088 *cpo-B* | |
2089 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings, | |
14372 | 2090 abbreviations, user commands and the "to" part of the |
2091 menu commands. Remove this flag to be able to use a | |
2092 backslash like a CTRL-V. For example, the command | |
2093 ":map X \<Esc>" results in X being mapped to: | |
7 | 2094 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>) |
2095 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters) | |
2096 ('<' excluded in both cases) | |
2097 *cpo-c* | |
2098 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the | |
2099 cursor position, but not further than the start of the | |
2100 next line. When not present searching continues | |
2101 one character from the cursor position. With 'c' | |
2102 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating | |
2103 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches. | |
2104 *cpo-C* | |
2105 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a | |
2106 backslash. See |line-continuation|. | |
2107 *cpo-d* | |
2108 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use | |
2109 the tags file relative to the current file, but the | |
2110 tags file in the current directory. | |
2111 *cpo-D* | |
2112 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode | |
2113 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and | |
2114 |t|. | |
2115 *cpo-e* | |
2116 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a | |
2117 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not | |
2118 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register | |
2119 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a | |
2120 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line | |
2121 and can be edited before hitting <CR>. | |
2122 *cpo-E* | |
2123 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or | |
2124 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when | |
13818
28ac7914b2b6
Update runtime files and translations
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13742
diff
changeset
|
2125 at least one character is to be operated on. Example: |
7 | 2126 This makes "y0" fail in the first column. |
2127 *cpo-f* | |
2128 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
2129 argument will set the file name for the current buffer, | |
2130 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet. | |
2131 *cpo-F* | |
2132 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
2133 argument will set the file name for the current | |
2134 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name | |
590 | 2135 yet. Also see |cpo-P|. |
7 | 2136 *cpo-g* |
2137 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument. | |
164 | 2138 *cpo-H* |
2139 H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert | |
2140 before the last blank. Without this flag insert after | |
2141 the last blank. | |
7 | 2142 *cpo-i* |
2143 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will | |
2144 leave it modified. | |
10 | 2145 *cpo-I* |
2146 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting | |
2147 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent. | |
7 | 2148 *cpo-j* |
2149 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.', | |
2150 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'. | |
2151 *cpo-J* | |
2152 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after | |
233 | 2153 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as |
7 | 2154 white space. |
2155 *cpo-k* | |
2156 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in | |
2157 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu | |
2158 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[ | |
2159 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X | |
2160 being mapped to: | |
2161 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters) | |
2162 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code) | |
2163 Also see the '<' flag below. | |
2164 *cpo-K* | |
2165 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is | |
2166 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when | |
2167 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It | |
2168 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>. | |
2169 *cpo-l* | |
2170 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
168 | 2171 literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special. |
2172 See |/[]| | |
7 | 2173 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't' |
2174 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab> | |
168 | 2175 Also see |cpo-\|. |
7 | 2176 *cpo-L* |
2177 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin', | |
2178 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode | |
2179 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of | |
2180 the normal behavior of a <Tab>. | |
2181 *cpo-m* | |
2182 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a | |
2183 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half | |
2184 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'| | |
2185 *cpo-M* | |
2186 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into | |
2187 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer | |
2188 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores | |
2189 backslashes, which is Vi compatible. | |
2190 *cpo-n* | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2191 n When included, the column used for 'number' and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2192 'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2193 lines. |
7 | 2194 *cpo-o* |
2195 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for | |
2196 next search. | |
2197 *cpo-O* | |
2198 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even | |
2199 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a | |
2200 protection against a file unexpectedly created by | |
2201 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this. | |
2202 *cpo-p* | |
2203 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a | |
2204 slightly better algorithm is used. | |
590 | 2205 *cpo-P* |
2206 P When included, a ":write" command that appends to a | |
2207 file will set the file name for the current buffer, if | |
2208 the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and | |
2209 the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|. | |
164 | 2210 *cpo-q* |
2211 q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the | |
2212 position where it would be when joining two lines. | |
7 | 2213 *cpo-r* |
2214 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search | |
2215 command, instead of the actually used search string. | |
2216 *cpo-R* | |
2217 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag | |
2218 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used. | |
2219 *cpo-s* | |
2220 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the | |
2221 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0. | |
10 | 2222 And it is the default. If not present the options are |
7 | 2223 set when the buffer is created. |
2224 *cpo-S* | |
2225 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer | |
2226 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and | |
2227 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting. | |
2228 The options are set to the values in the current | |
2229 buffer. When you change an option and go to another | |
2230 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the | |
2231 buffer options global to all buffers. | |
2232 | |
2233 's' 'S' copy buffer options | |
2234 no no when buffer created | |
2235 yes no when buffer first entered (default) | |
2236 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.) | |
2237 *cpo-t* | |
2238 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for | |
2239 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in | |
2240 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the | |
2241 last used search pattern. | |
2242 *cpo-u* | |
10 | 2243 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|. |
7 | 2244 *cpo-v* |
2245 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in | |
2246 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are | |
2247 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the | |
2248 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced | |
2249 characters. | |
2250 *cpo-w* | |
2251 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one | |
2252 character and not all blanks until the start of the | |
2253 next word. | |
2254 *cpo-W* | |
2255 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!" | |
2256 overwrites a readonly file, if possible. | |
2257 *cpo-x* | |
2258 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line. | |
2259 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line, | |
2260 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>| | |
164 | 2261 *cpo-X* |
2262 X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is | |
2263 deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "." | |
2264 and a count. | |
7 | 2265 *cpo-y* |
2266 y A yank command can be redone with ".". | |
164 | 2267 *cpo-Z* |
2268 Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set, | |
2269 don't reset 'readonly'. | |
7 | 2270 *cpo-!* |
2271 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used | |
2272 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last | |
2273 used -filter- command is used. | |
2274 *cpo-$* | |
2275 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the | |
2276 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text. | |
2277 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the | |
2278 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any | |
2279 command that moves the cursor from the insertion | |
2280 point. | |
2281 *cpo-%* | |
2282 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command. | |
2283 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc. | |
2284 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/". | |
2285 Parens inside single and double quotes are also | |
2286 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to | |
2287 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like | |
2288 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not | |
2289 match the last one. When this flag is not included, | |
2290 parens inside single and double quotes are treated | |
2291 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes, | |
2292 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a | |
2293 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if | |
10 | 2294 there is one). This works very well for C programs. |
36 | 2295 This flag is also used for other features, such as |
2296 C-indenting. | |
161 | 2297 *cpo--* |
2298 - When included, a vertical movement command fails when | |
632 | 2299 it would go above the first line or below the last |
2300 line. Without it the cursor moves to the first or | |
2301 last line, unless it already was in that line. | |
161 | 2302 Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j", |
632 | 2303 CTRL-N, CTRL-J and ":1234". |
39 | 2304 *cpo-+* |
2305 + When included, a ":write file" command will reset the | |
2306 'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer | |
2307 itself may still be different from its file. | |
856 | 2308 *cpo-star* |
7 | 2309 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included, |
2310 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area. | |
2311 *cpo-<* | |
2312 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>| | |
2313 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of | |
10 | 2314 menu commands. For example, the command |
7 | 2315 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to: |
2316 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters) | |
2317 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>) | |
2318 Also see the 'k' flag above. | |
164 | 2319 *cpo->* |
2320 > When appending to a register, put a line break before | |
2321 the appended text. | |
2925 | 2322 *cpo-;* |
2323 ; When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search | |
2324 and the cursor is right in front of the searched | |
2325 character, the cursor won't move. When not included, | |
2326 the cursor would skip over it and jump to the | |
3557 | 2327 following occurrence. |
164 | 2328 |
2329 POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except | |
2330 when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix| | |
2331 | |
2332 contains behavior ~ | |
856 | 2333 *cpo-#* |
164 | 2334 # A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect. |
168 | 2335 *cpo-&* |
2336 & When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when | |
2337 exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded. | |
2338 This flag is tested when exiting. | |
2339 *cpo-\* | |
2340 \ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
2341 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]| | |
488 | 2342 '\' included: "/[ \-]" finds <Space>, '\' and '-' |
2343 '\' excluded: "/[ \-]" finds <Space> and '-' | |
2344 Also see |cpo-l|. | |
168 | 2345 *cpo-/* |
2346 / When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s| | |
2347 command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%| | |
164 | 2348 *cpo-{* |
2349 { The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character | |
2350 at the start of a line. | |
168 | 2351 *cpo-.* |
2352 . The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current | |
2353 buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't | |
2354 need this, since it remembers the full path of an | |
2355 opened file. | |
164 | 2356 *cpo-bar* |
2357 | The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment | |
2358 variables overrule the terminal size values obtained | |
2359 with system specific functions. | |
2360 | |
7 | 2361 |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2362 *'cryptmethod'* *'cm'* |
6336 | 2363 'cryptmethod' 'cm' string (default "zip") |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2364 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2365 {not in Vi} |
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2366 Method used for encryption when the buffer is written to a file: |
2184
5028c4d6d825
Fixed encryption big/little endian test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2180
diff
changeset
|
2367 *pkzip* |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2368 zip PkZip compatible method. A weak kind of encryption. |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2369 Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older. |
2184
5028c4d6d825
Fixed encryption big/little endian test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2180
diff
changeset
|
2370 *blowfish* |
6122 | 2371 blowfish Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption but it has |
2372 an implementation flaw. Requires Vim 7.3 or later, | |
2373 files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older. This adds | |
2374 a "seed" to the file, every time you write the file | |
2375 the encrypted bytes will be different. | |
2376 *blowfish2* | |
2377 blowfish2 Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption. Requires | |
7876
93f747af7b58
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5e9b2fa9bb0e6061cf18457c173cd141a5dc9c92
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7687
diff
changeset
|
2378 Vim 7.4.401 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.3 |
6122 | 2379 and older. This adds a "seed" to the file, every time |
2380 you write the file the encrypted bytes will be | |
2381 different. The whole undo file is encrypted, not just | |
2382 the pieces of text. | |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2383 |
8748
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
2384 You should use "blowfish2", also to re-encrypt older files. |
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
2385 |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2386 When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2387 to the detected method of the file being read. Thus if you write it |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2388 without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used. |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2389 Changing 'cryptmethod' does not mark the file as modified, you have to |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2390 explicitly write it, you don't get a warning unless there are other |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2391 modifications. Also see |:X|. |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2392 |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2393 When setting the global value to an empty string, it will end up with |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2394 the value "zip". When setting the local value to an empty string the |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2395 buffer will use the global value. |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2396 |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2397 When a new encryption method is added in a later version of Vim, and |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2398 the current version does not recognize it, you will get *E821* . |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2399 You need to edit this file with the later version of Vim. |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2400 |
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2401 |
7 | 2402 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'* |
2403 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0) | |
2404 global | |
2405 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2406 feature} | |
2407 {not in Vi} | |
2408 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags. | |
2409 See |cscopepathcomp|. | |
11160 | 2410 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 2411 |
2412 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'* | |
2413 'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope") | |
2414 global | |
2415 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2416 feature} | |
2417 {not in Vi} | |
2418 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|. | |
2419 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2420 security reasons. | |
2421 | |
2422 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'* | |
2423 'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "") | |
2424 global | |
2425 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2426 or |+quickfix| features} | |
2427 {not in Vi} | |
2428 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results. | |
2429 See |cscopequickfix|. | |
2430 | |
4869 | 2431 *'cscoperelative'* *'csre'* *'nocscoperelative'* *'nocsre'* |
2873 | 2432 'cscoperelative' 'csre' boolean (default off) |
2433 global | |
2434 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2435 feature} | |
2436 {not in Vi} | |
2437 In the absence of a prefix (-P) for cscope. setting this option enables | |
2438 to use the basename of cscope.out path as the prefix. | |
2439 See |cscoperelative|. | |
11160 | 2440 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
2873 | 2441 |
7 | 2442 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'* |
2443 'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off) | |
2444 global | |
2445 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2446 feature} | |
2447 {not in Vi} | |
2448 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|. | |
2449 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2450 | |
2451 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'* | |
2452 'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0) | |
2453 global | |
2454 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2455 feature} | |
2456 {not in Vi} | |
2457 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See | |
2458 |cscopetagorder|. | |
2459 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
2460 | |
2461 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'* | |
2462 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'* | |
2463 'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off) | |
2464 global | |
2465 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2466 feature} | |
2467 {not in Vi} | |
2468 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|. | |
2469 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2470 | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2471 *'cursorbind'* *'crb'* *'nocursorbind'* *'nocrb'* |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2472 'cursorbind' 'crb' boolean (default off) |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2473 local to window |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2474 {not in Vi} |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2475 When this option is set, as the cursor in the current |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2476 window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2477 this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2478 column. This option is useful for viewing the |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2479 differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode, |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2480 inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are |
2314
233eb4412f5d
Added 'colorcolumn' option. Partly by Gregor Uhlenheuer.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2302
diff
changeset
|
2481 taken into account. |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2482 |
743 | 2483 |
2484 *'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'* | |
2485 'cursorcolumn' 'cuc' boolean (default off) | |
2486 local to window | |
2487 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2488 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
743 | 2489 feature} |
2490 Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn | |
2491 |hl-CursorColumn|. Useful to align text. Will make screen redrawing | |
2492 slower. | |
826 | 2493 If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use |
2494 these autocommands: > | |
2495 au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn | |
2496 au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn | |
2497 < | |
743 | 2498 |
2499 *'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'* | |
2500 'cursorline' 'cul' boolean (default off) | |
2501 local to window | |
2502 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2503 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
743 | 2504 feature} |
2505 Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine | |
2506 |hl-CursorLine|. Useful to easily spot the cursor. Will make screen | |
2507 redrawing slower. | |
818 | 2508 When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it |
825 | 2509 easier to see the selected text. |
743 | 2510 |
2511 | |
7 | 2512 *'debug'* |
2513 'debug' string (default "") | |
2514 global | |
2515 {not in Vi} | |
839 | 2516 These values can be used: |
2517 msg Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2518 anyway. | |
2519 throw Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2520 anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|. | |
2521 beep A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be | |
2522 produced. | |
168 | 2523 The values can be combined, separated by a comma. |
839 | 2524 "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or |
2525 'indentexpr'. | |
7 | 2526 |
2527 *'define'* *'def'* | |
2528 'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define") | |
2529 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2530 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 2531 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search |
7 | 2532 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the |
2533 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is | |
2534 used to recognize the defined name after the match: | |
2535 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char} | |
2536 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space | |
2537 or backslash. | |
2538 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be | |
2539 useful, to include const type declarations: > | |
2540 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\) | |
2541 < When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes! | |
2542 | |
2543 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'* | |
2544 'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off) | |
2545 global | |
2546 {not in Vi} | |
2547 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2548 feature} | |
2549 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode | |
2550 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the | |
2551 default) the character along with its combining characters are | |
2552 deleted. | |
2553 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"! | |
2554 | |
2555 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one | |
2556 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want | |
2557 to remove only the combining ones. | |
11160 | 2558 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 2559 |
2560 *'dictionary'* *'dict'* | |
2561 'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "") | |
2562 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2563 {not in Vi} | |
2564 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
2565 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should | |
2566 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several | |
2567 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is | |
2568 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes. | |
13950
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2569 |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2570 When this option is empty or an entry "spell" is present, and spell |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2571 checking is enabled, words in the word lists for the currently active |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2572 'spelllang' are used. See |spell|. |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2573 |
10 | 2574 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 2575 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
2576 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
99 | 2577 This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type. |
7 | 2578 Where to find a list of words? |
2579 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words". | |
2580 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory. | |
2581 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection. | |
2582 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2583 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2584 uses another default. | |
2585 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
2586 | |
2587 *'diff'* *'nodiff'* | |
2588 'diff' boolean (default off) | |
2589 local to window | |
2590 {not in Vi} | |
2591 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2592 feature} | |
2593 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences | |
10 | 2594 between files. See |vimdiff|. |
7 | 2595 |
2596 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'* | |
2597 'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "") | |
2598 global | |
2599 {not in Vi} | |
2600 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2601 feature} | |
2602 Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two | |
2603 versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|. | |
2604 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2605 security reasons. | |
2606 | |
2607 *'dip'* *'diffopt'* | |
2608 'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler") | |
2609 global | |
2610 {not in Vi} | |
2611 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2612 feature} | |
10 | 2613 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items. |
7 | 2614 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma. |
2615 | |
2616 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text | |
2617 synchronized with a window that has inserted | |
2618 lines at the same position. Mostly useful | |
2619 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind' | |
2620 is set. | |
2621 | |
2622 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change | |
2623 and a fold that contains unchanged lines. | |
2624 When omitted a context of six lines is used. | |
2625 See |fold-diff|. | |
2626 | |
2627 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A" | |
2628 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag | |
2629 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty. | |
2630 | |
2631 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds | |
2632 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if | |
2633 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation | |
2634 of the "diff" command for what this does | |
2635 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing | |
2636 white space, but not leading white space. | |
2637 | |
766 | 2638 horizontal Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless |
2639 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2640 | |
2641 vertical Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless | |
2642 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2643 | |
12971
ca3cb1997f08
patch 8.0.1361: some users don't want to diff with hidden buffers
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12968
diff
changeset
|
2644 hiddenoff Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it |
ca3cb1997f08
patch 8.0.1361: some users don't want to diff with hidden buffers
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12968
diff
changeset
|
2645 becomes hidden. |
ca3cb1997f08
patch 8.0.1361: some users don't want to diff with hidden buffers
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12968
diff
changeset
|
2646 |
766 | 2647 foldcolumn:{n} Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when |
2648 starting diff mode. Without this 2 is used. | |
2649 | |
7 | 2650 Examples: > |
2651 | |
2652 :set diffopt=filler,context:4 | |
2653 :set diffopt= | |
766 | 2654 :set diffopt=filler,foldcolumn:3 |
7 | 2655 < |
2656 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'* | |
2657 'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off) | |
2658 global | |
2659 {not in Vi} | |
2660 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs| | |
2661 feature} | |
2662 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS> | |
2663 {char2}. See |digraphs|. | |
2664 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2665 | |
2666 *'directory'* *'dir'* | |
2667 'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
5555 | 2668 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:\tmp,c:\temp" |
7 | 2669 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp") |
2670 global | |
2671 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas. | |
2672 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is | |
2673 possible. | |
2674 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is | |
2675 impossible!). | |
2676 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as | |
2677 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so | |
2678 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden" | |
2679 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible. | |
33 | 2680 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 2681 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading |
2682 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
459 | 2683 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//" |
2684 or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to | |
2685 the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. | |
2686 This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory. | |
1698 | 2687 On Win32, when a separating comma is following, you must use "//", |
2688 since "\\" will include the comma in the file name. | |
7 | 2689 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part |
2690 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
2691 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
2692 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
2693 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'. | |
2694 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2695 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
2696 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
2697 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
2698 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
2699 of the option is removed. | |
2700 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing | |
2701 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is | |
2702 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file. | |
2703 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better | |
2704 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap | |
2705 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your | |
2706 home directory is tried first. | |
2707 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2708 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2709 uses another default. | |
2710 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2711 security reasons. | |
2712 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"} | |
2713 | |
2714 *'display'* *'dy'* | |
9737
35ce559b8553
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/bc8801c9317eb721a2ee91322669f2dd5d136380
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9669
diff
changeset
|
2715 'display' 'dy' string (default "", set to "truncate" in |
35ce559b8553
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/bc8801c9317eb721a2ee91322669f2dd5d136380
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9669
diff
changeset
|
2716 |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 2717 global |
2718 {not in Vi} | |
2719 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of | |
2720 flags: | |
2721 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line | |
9665
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2722 in a window will be displayed. "@@@" is put in the |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2723 last columns of the last screen line to indicate the |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2724 rest of the line is not displayed. |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2725 truncate Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2726 column of the last screen line. Overrules "lastline". |
7 | 2727 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx> |
2728 instead of using ^C and ~C. | |
2729 | |
10211
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
2730 When neither "lastline" nor "truncate" is included, a last line that |
9665
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2731 doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines. |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2732 |
7 | 2733 *'eadirection'* *'ead'* |
2734 'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both") | |
2735 global | |
2736 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2737 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 2738 feature} |
2739 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies: | |
2740 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected | |
2741 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected | |
2742 both width and height of windows is affected | |
2743 | |
2744 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'* | |
2745 'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off) | |
2746 global | |
2747 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be | |
2748 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See | |
2749 also 'gdefault' option. | |
11442 | 2750 Switching this option on may break plugins! |
7 | 2751 |
8876
47f17f66da3d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/03413f44167c4b5cd0012def9bb331e2518c83cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8835
diff
changeset
|
2752 *'emoji'* *'emo'* *'noemoji'* *'noemo'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2753 'emoji' 'emo' boolean (default: on) |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2754 global |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2755 {not in Vi} |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2756 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2757 feature} |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2758 When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width. |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2759 |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2760 |
7 | 2761 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543* |
2762 'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG) | |
2763 global | |
2764 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2765 feature} | |
2766 {not in Vi} | |
2767 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in | |
2768 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the | |
2769 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work | |
2770 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values. | |
2771 | |
2772 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the | |
39 | 2773 existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid. |
7 | 2774 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim |
1152 | 2775 starts up. See |multibyte|. To reload the menus see |:menutrans|. |
7 | 2776 |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2777 This option cannot be set from a |modeline|. It would most likely |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2778 corrupt the text. |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2779 |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
2780 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 or later, it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
2781 to "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of |
7 | 2782 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and |
2783 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made | |
10 | 2784 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal |
7 | 2785 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files |
2786 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty). | |
2787 | |
2788 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'. | |
10 | 2789 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with |
7 | 2790 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'. |
2791 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2792 If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2793 can use: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2794 if has("multi_byte_encoding") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2795 < |
7 | 2796 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will |
2797 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If | |
2798 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be | |
2799 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|. | |
2800 | |
2801 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand | |
2802 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary. | |
2803 | |
2804 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
2805 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated | |
2806 to '-' signs. | |
2807 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name. | |
2808 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes | |
2809 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8". | |
2810 | |
2811 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected. | |
2812 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the | |
2813 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and | |
2814 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using | |
2815 utf-8. | |
2816 | |
2817 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8. | |
2818 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the | |
2819 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus | |
2820 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has | |
2821 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty. | |
448 | 2822 |
2823 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was | |
2824 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed. | |
7 | 2825 |
2826 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'* | |
2827 'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on) | |
2828 local to buffer | |
2829 {not in Vi} | |
2830 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option | |
6933 | 2831 is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the |
2832 last line in the file. This option is automatically set or reset when | |
2833 starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL> | |
2834 for the last line in the file. Normally you don't have to set or | |
2835 reset this option. | |
2836 When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when | |
2837 writing the file. When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used | |
2838 to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so | |
2839 that when you write the file the situation from the original file can | |
2840 be kept. But you can change it if you want to. | |
7 | 2841 |
2842 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'* | |
2843 'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on) | |
2844 global | |
2845 {not in Vi} | |
2846 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after | |
33 | 2847 splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the |
2848 option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the | |
2849 size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When | |
2850 closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it | |
2851 (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright'). | |
7 | 2852 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size |
2853 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The | |
2854 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected. | |
1354 | 2855 Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting |
2856 'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2857 If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2858 currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2859 the future). |
7 | 2860 |
2861 *'equalprg'* *'ep'* | |
2862 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "") | |
2863 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2864 {not in Vi} | |
2865 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty | |
1621 | 2866 the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent' |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2867 or 'indentexpr'. When Vim was compiled without internal formatting, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2868 the "indent" program is used. |
10 | 2869 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
7 | 2870 about including spaces and backslashes. |
2871 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2872 security reasons. | |
2873 | |
2874 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'* | |
2875 'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off) | |
2876 global | |
2877 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only | |
2878 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always | |
2879 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal | |
10 | 2880 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep, |
6949 | 2881 screen flash or do nothing. See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the |
2882 bell. | |
7 | 2883 |
2884 *'errorfile'* *'ef'* | |
2885 'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err", | |
2886 others: "errors.err") | |
2887 global | |
2888 {not in Vi} | |
2889 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2890 feature} | |
2891 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|). | |
2892 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the | |
2893 following argument. See |-q|. | |
2894 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that. | |
2895 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2896 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
2897 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2898 security reasons. | |
2899 | |
2900 *'errorformat'* *'efm'* | |
2901 'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long) | |
2902 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2903 {not in Vi} | |
2904 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2905 feature} | |
2906 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file | |
2907 (see |errorformat|). | |
2908 | |
2909 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'* | |
2910 'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
2911 global | |
2912 {not in Vi} | |
2913 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert | |
2914 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be | |
2915 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of | |
2916 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of | |
2917 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to | |
2918 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that | |
2919 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys | |
2920 won't work by default. | |
2921 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2922 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
2923 | |
2924 *'eventignore'* *'ei'* | |
2925 'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "") | |
2926 global | |
2927 {not in Vi} | |
2928 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored. | |
844 | 2929 When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand |
2930 events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed. | |
7 | 2931 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: > |
2932 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave | |
2933 < | |
2934 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'* | |
2935 'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off) | |
2936 local to buffer | |
2937 {not in Vi} | |
2938 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a | |
10 | 2939 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and |
7 | 2940 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is |
2941 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
2942 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and restored when |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
2943 the 'paste' option is reset. |
7 | 2944 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
2945 | |
2946 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'* | |
2947 'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off) | |
2948 global | |
2949 {not in Vi} | |
2950 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current | |
10027
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2951 directory. |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2952 |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2953 Setting this option is a potential security leak. E.g., consider |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2954 unpacking a package or fetching files from github, a .vimrc in there |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2955 might be a trojan horse. BETTER NOT SET THIS OPTION! |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2956 Instead, define an autocommand in your .vimrc to set options for a |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2957 matching directory. |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2958 |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2959 If you do switch this option on you should also consider setting the |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2960 'secure' option (see |initialization|). |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
2961 Also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|. |
7 | 2962 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
2963 security reasons. | |
2964 | |
2965 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213* | |
2966 'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "") | |
2967 local to buffer | |
2968 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2969 feature} | |
2970 {not in Vi} | |
2971 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2972 |
7 | 2973 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2974 done when writing the file. For reading see below. |
7 | 2975 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be |
2976 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file). | |
11062 | 2977 No error will be given when the value is set, only when it is used, |
2978 only when writing a file. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2979 Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2980 both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8. That's |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2981 because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8. |
7 | 2982 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2983 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2984 is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2985 results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2986 characters may be lost! |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2987 |
7 | 2988 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be |
2989 specified that can be handled by the converter, see | |
2990 |mbyte-conversion|. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2991 |
7 | 2992 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'. |
2993 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting | |
1152 | 2994 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument. One exception: when |
2995 'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used. | |
692 | 2996 For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used. |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2997 |
7 | 2998 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored. |
2999 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
3000 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are | |
3001 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for | |
3002 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example | |
3003 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2". | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3004 |
7 | 3005 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' |
3006 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3007 |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3008 Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3009 AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3010 written. If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3011 'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q". |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3012 |
7 | 3013 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. |
3014 | |
3015 *'fe'* | |
3016 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the | |
10 | 3017 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The |
7 | 3018 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used. |
3019 | |
3020 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'* | |
39 | 3021 'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", |
3022 "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when | |
3023 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value) | |
7 | 3024 global |
3025 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
3026 feature} | |
3027 {not in Vi} | |
3028 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit | |
3029 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first | |
3030 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one | |
3031 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works, | |
10 | 3032 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to |
7 | 3033 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used. |
3034 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When | |
3035 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants) | |
3036 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse | |
3037 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not | |
596 | 3038 "utf-8" some non-ASCII characters may be lost! You can use |
3039 the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters | |
3040 that can't be converted. | |
7 | 3041 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings |
3042 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except | |
3043 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer | |
3044 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your | |
3045 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: > | |
3046 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 | | |
3047 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif | |
3048 < This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain | |
3049 non-blank characters. | |
596 | 3050 When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is |
3051 not used. | |
692 | 3052 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value |
3053 of 'fileencoding' is used instead. You can set it with: > | |
3054 :setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2 | |
3055 < This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than | |
3056 an empty file. | |
7 | 3057 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM |
3058 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded | |
3059 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly. | |
3060 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last, | |
3061 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always | |
3062 accepted. | |
39 | 3063 The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the |
3064 environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful | |
3065 when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a | |
3066 non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian. | |
777 | 3067 When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte |
3068 sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8. You can use the |8g8| | |
3069 command to find the illegal byte sequence. | |
7 | 3070 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG: |
3071 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used | |
3072 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8 | |
3073 file | |
3074 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used | |
3075 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified. | |
3076 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values. | |
3077 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file | |
3078 is read. | |
3079 | |
3080 *'fileformat'* *'ff'* | |
3081 'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos", | |
3082 Unix default: "unix", | |
3083 Macintosh default: "mac") | |
3084 local to buffer | |
3085 {not in Vi} | |
3086 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for | |
3087 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file: | |
3088 dos <CR> <NL> | |
3089 unix <NL> | |
3090 mac <CR> | |
3091 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored. | |
3092 See |file-formats| and |file-read|. | |
3093 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'. | |
3094 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O | |
4264 | 3095 works like it was set to "unix". |
7 | 3096 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and |
3097 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off. | |
3098 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' | |
3099 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
3100 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. | |
3101 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos", | |
3102 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset. | |
3103 | |
3104 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'* | |
3105 'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default: | |
3106 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix", | |
3107 Vim Unix: "unix,dos", | |
3108 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos", | |
3109 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos", | |
3110 Vi others: "") | |
3111 global | |
3112 {not in Vi} | |
3113 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when | |
3114 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing | |
3115 buffer: | |
3116 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used | |
3117 always. It is not set automatically. | |
3118 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer | |
10 | 3119 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The |
7 | 3120 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing |
3121 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to. | |
3122 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic | |
3123 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to | |
3124 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>: | |
3125 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos", | |
3126 'fileformat' is set to "dos". | |
3127 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat' | |
10 | 3128 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a |
7 | 3129 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos". |
6647 | 3130 3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if a <CR> is found, and |
3131 if 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac". | |
2587 | 3132 This means that "mac" is only chosen when: |
3133 "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and | |
3134 "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file. | |
3135 Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before | |
3136 the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in | |
2642 | 3137 the first few lines, "mac" is used. |
7 | 3138 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from |
3139 'fileformats' is used. | |
3140 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but | |
3141 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that | |
3142 file only, the option is not changed. | |
3143 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used. | |
3144 | |
8748
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
3145 When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used. You |
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
3146 can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc. |
2662 | 3147 |
7 | 3148 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that |
3149 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be | |
3150 done: | |
3151 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos | |
3152 format will be used. | |
3153 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection | |
3154 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a | |
3155 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is | |
3156 used. | |
3157 Also see |file-formats|. | |
3158 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty | |
3159 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset, | |
3160 otherwise 'textauto' is set. | |
3161 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3162 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3163 | |
4264 | 3164 *'fileignorecase'* *'fic'* *'nofileignorecase'* *'nofic'* |
3165 'fileignorecase' 'fic' boolean (default on for systems where case in file | |
3166 names is normally ignored) | |
4242 | 3167 global |
3168 {not in Vi} | |
3169 When set case is ignored when using file names and directories. | |
3170 See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion. | |
3171 | |
7 | 3172 *'filetype'* *'ft'* |
3173 'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "") | |
3174 local to buffer | |
3175 {not in Vi} | |
3176 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered. | |
3177 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be | |
3178 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file | |
3179 name. | |
3180 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type. | |
3181 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable | |
3182 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype| | |
3183 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline, | |
3184 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized. | |
782 | 3185 Example, for in an IDL file: |
3186 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */ ~ | |
3187 |FileType| |filetypes| | |
3188 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
3189 names. Example: | |
3190 /* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
3191 This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype. | |
3192 This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files. More than | |
3193 one dot may appear. | |
7 | 3194 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or |
3195 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 3196 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 3197 |
3198 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'* | |
3199 'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-") | |
3200 global | |
3201 {not in Vi} | |
3202 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| | |
3203 and |+folding| features} | |
3204 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators. | |
3205 It is a comma separated list of items: | |
3206 | |
3207 item default Used for ~ | |
3208 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window | |
8061
abd64cf67bcf
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/38a55639d603823efcf2d2fdf542dbffdeb60b75
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7876
diff
changeset
|
3209 stlnc:c ' ' or '=' statusline of the non-current windows |
7 | 3210 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit| |
3211 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext' | |
3212 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option | |
3213 | |
10 | 3214 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and |
8061
abd64cf67bcf
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/38a55639d603823efcf2d2fdf542dbffdeb60b75
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7876
diff
changeset
|
3215 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '=' |
7 | 3216 otherwise. |
3217 | |
3218 Example: > | |
8061
abd64cf67bcf
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/38a55639d603823efcf2d2fdf542dbffdeb60b75
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7876
diff
changeset
|
3219 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:=,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:- |
7 | 3220 < This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also |
3221 be used when there is highlighting. | |
3222 | |
819 | 3223 for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported. |
3224 | |
7 | 3225 The highlighting used for these items: |
3226 item highlight group ~ | |
3227 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine| | |
3228 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC| | |
3229 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit| | |
3230 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded| | |
3231 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete| | |
3232 | |
6933 | 3233 *'fixendofline'* *'fixeol'* *'nofixendofline'* *'nofixeol'* |
3234 'fixendofline' 'fixeol' boolean (default on) | |
3235 local to buffer | |
3236 {not in Vi} | |
3237 When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file | |
3238 will be restored if missing. Turn this option off if you want to | |
3239 preserve the situation from the original file. | |
3240 When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't | |
3241 matter. | |
3242 See the 'endofline' option. | |
3243 | |
7 | 3244 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'* |
3245 'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198* | |
3246 global | |
3247 {not in Vi} | |
3248 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
3249 feature} | |
3250 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set. | |
3251 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
10 | 3252 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 3253 |
3254 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'* | |
3255 'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "") | |
3256 global | |
3257 {not in Vi} | |
3258 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3259 feature} | |
3260 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and | |
3261 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to | |
3262 automatically close when moving out of them. | |
3263 | |
3264 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'* | |
3265 'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0) | |
3266 local to window | |
3267 {not in Vi} | |
3268 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3269 feature} | |
3270 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side | |
3271 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum | |
3272 value is 12. | |
3273 See |folding|. | |
3274 | |
3275 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'* | |
3276 'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on) | |
3277 local to window | |
3278 {not in Vi} | |
3279 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3280 feature} | |
3281 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly | |
3282 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with | |
3283 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled | |
10 | 3284 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when |
7 | 3285 'foldenable' is off. |
3286 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold. | |
3287 See |folding|. | |
3288 | |
3289 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'* | |
3290 'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0") | |
3291 local to window | |
3292 {not in Vi} | |
3293 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3294 or |+eval| features} |
7 | 3295 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated |
634 | 3296 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. |
782 | 3297 |
3682 | 3298 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a |
3299 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3300 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3301 on. |
634 | 3302 |
3303 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3304 evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|. | |
7 | 3305 |
3306 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'* | |
3307 'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#") | |
3308 local to window | |
3309 {not in Vi} | |
3310 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3311 feature} | |
3312 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with | |
3313 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding | |
10 | 3314 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character. |
7 | 3315 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|. |
3316 | |
3317 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'* | |
3318 'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0) | |
3319 local to window | |
3320 {not in Vi} | |
3321 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3322 feature} | |
3323 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed. | |
3324 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will | |
3325 close fewer folds. | |
3326 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|. | |
3327 See |fold-foldlevel|. | |
3328 | |
3329 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'* | |
3330 'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1) | |
3331 global | |
3332 {not in Vi} | |
3333 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3334 feature} | |
3335 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window. | |
3336 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero), | |
3337 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99). | |
3338 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline | |
10 | 3339 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also |
7 | 3340 ignores this option and closes all folds. |
3341 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to | |
3342 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files. | |
3343 When the value is negative, it is not used. | |
3344 | |
3345 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536* | |
3346 'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}") | |
3347 local to window | |
3348 {not in Vi} | |
3349 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3350 feature} | |
3351 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There | |
3352 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The | |
3353 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow). | |
3354 See |fold-marker|. | |
3355 | |
3356 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'* | |
3357 'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual") | |
3358 local to window | |
3359 {not in Vi} | |
3360 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3361 feature} | |
3362 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values: | |
3363 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually. | |
3364 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold. | |
3365 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line. | |
3366 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds. | |
3367 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds. | |
3368 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed. | |
3369 | |
3370 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'* | |
3371 'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1) | |
3372 local to window | |
3373 {not in Vi} | |
3374 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3375 feature} | |
2709 | 3376 Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed |
3377 closed. Also for manually closed folds. With the default value of | |
3378 one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines. | |
3379 Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line. | |
2826 | 3380 Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed. After using |
7 | 3381 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller |
3382 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold. | |
3383 | |
3384 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'* | |
3385 'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20) | |
3386 local to window | |
3387 {not in Vi} | |
3388 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3389 feature} | |
3390 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax" | |
3391 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more | |
3392 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20. | |
3393 | |
3394 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'* | |
3395 'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix, | |
3396 search,tag,undo") | |
3397 global | |
3398 {not in Vi} | |
3399 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3400 feature} | |
3401 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the | |
3402 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated | |
3403 list of items. | |
2625 | 3404 NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. |
3405 Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect. | |
3406 (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself) | |
3407 | |
7 | 3408 item commands ~ |
3409 all any | |
3410 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc. | |
3411 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc. | |
3412 insert any command in Insert mode | |
3413 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc. | |
3414 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc. | |
3415 percent "%" | |
3416 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc. | |
3417 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc. | |
3418 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command) | |
819 | 3419 Also for |[s| and |]s|. |
7 | 3420 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc. |
3421 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R | |
3422 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%") | |
3423 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the | |
3424 whole closed fold. | |
3425 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it | |
3426 very difficult to move onto a closed fold. | |
3427 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open | |
3428 when text is inserted. | |
3429 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or | |
3430 set the 'foldclose' option to "all". | |
3431 | |
3432 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'* | |
3433 'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()") | |
3434 local to window | |
3435 {not in Vi} | |
3436 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3437 feature} | |
3438 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed | |
3439 fold. See |fold-foldtext|. | |
3440 | |
3682 | 3441 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a |
3442 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 3443 |
3444 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3445 evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|. | |
3446 | |
9286
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3447 *'formatexpr'* *'fex'* |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3448 'formatexpr' 'fex' string (default "") |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3449 local to buffer |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3450 {not in Vi} |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3451 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3452 feature} |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3453 Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq| |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3454 operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions'). When this |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3455 option is empty 'formatprg' is used. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3456 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3457 The |v:lnum| variable holds the first line to be formatted. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3458 The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3459 The |v:char| variable holds the character that is going to be |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3460 inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3461 automatic formatting. This can be empty. Don't insert |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3462 it yet! |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3463 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3464 Example: > |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3465 :set formatexpr=mylang#Format() |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3466 < This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3467 autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload| |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3468 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3469 The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3470 text beyond that limit. This happens under the same conditions as |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3471 when internal formatting is used. Make sure the cursor is kept in the |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3472 same spot relative to the text then! The |mode()| function will |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3473 return "i" or "R" in this situation. |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
3474 |
9286
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3475 When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3476 the internal format mechanism. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3477 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3478 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3479 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. That stops the option from working, |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3480 since changing the buffer text is not allowed. |
11160 | 3481 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
9286
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3482 |
7 | 3483 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'* |
3484 'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt") | |
3485 local to buffer | |
3486 {not in Vi} | |
3487 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic | |
3488 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is | |
3489 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can | |
3490 be inserted for readability. | |
3491 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3492 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3493 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3494 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3495 | |
41 | 3496 *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'* |
3497 'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*") | |
3498 local to buffer | |
3499 {not in Vi} | |
3500 A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for | |
3501 the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'. | |
3502 The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for | |
140 | 3503 the line below it. You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match |
41 | 3504 while still checking more characters. There must be a character |
3505 following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled | |
3506 like there is no match. | |
3507 The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation | |
3508 character and white space. | |
3509 | |
7 | 3510 *'formatprg'* *'fp'* |
3511 'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "") | |
10579
688b97124d23
patch 8.0.0179: cannot have a local value for 'formatprg'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10498
diff
changeset
|
3512 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 3513 {not in Vi} |
3514 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines | |
667 | 3515 selected with the |gq| operator. The program must take the input on |
7 | 3516 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is |
557 | 3517 such a program. |
667 | 3518 If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead. |
3519 Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal | |
3520 format function will be used |C-indenting|. | |
557 | 3521 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
3522 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
3682 | 3523 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
3524 security reasons. | |
667 | 3525 |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
3526 *'fsync'* *'fs'* *'nofsync'* *'nofs'* |
36 | 3527 'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on) |
3528 global | |
3529 {not in Vi} | |
3530 When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a | |
3531 file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely | |
3532 written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This | |
3533 will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop | |
3534 mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that | |
3535 turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On | |
3536 systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always | |
3537 off. | |
3538 Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files. | |
12865
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
3539 'fsync' also applies to |writefile()|, unless a flag is used to |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
3540 overrule it. |
36 | 3541 |
7 | 3542 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'* |
3543 'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off) | |
3544 global | |
3545 {not in Vi} | |
3546 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that | |
3547 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag | |
3548 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution | |
3549 of all or one match. See |complex-change|. | |
3550 | |
3551 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~ | |
3552 :s/// subst. all subst. one | |
3553 :s///g subst. one subst. all | |
3554 :s///gg subst. all subst. one | |
3555 | |
3556 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
11516
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
3557 DEPRECATED: Setting this option may break plugins that are not aware |
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
3558 of this option. Also, many users get confused that adding the /g flag |
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
3559 has the opposite effect of that it normally does. |
7 | 3560 |
3561 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'* | |
6213 | 3562 'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l:%m,%f:%l%m,%f %l%m") |
7 | 3563 global |
3564 {not in Vi} | |
3565 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output. | |
3566 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the | |
3567 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|. | |
3568 | |
3569 *'grepprg'* *'gp'* | |
3570 'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ", | |
3571 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null", | |
3572 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n", | |
3573 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ") | |
3574 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
3575 {not in Vi} | |
233 | 3576 Program to use for the |:grep| command. This option may contain '%' |
7 | 3577 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command- |
3578 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments | |
3579 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See | |
3580 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
3581 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep" | |
3582 also work well with a single file: > | |
3583 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH | |
161 | 3584 < Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command |
657 | 3585 works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like |
3586 |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|. | |
41 | 3587 See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there |
7 | 3588 apply equally to 'grepprg'. |
3589 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found, | |
3590 otherwise it's "grep -n". | |
3591 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
3592 security reasons. | |
3593 | |
3594 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549* | |
3595 'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3596 ve:ver35-Cursor, | |
3597 o:hor50-Cursor, | |
3598 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3599 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3600 sm:block-Cursor | |
3601 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175", | |
3602 for MS-DOS and Win32 console: | |
3603 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15, | |
3604 r-cr:hor30,sm:block") | |
3605 global | |
3606 {not in Vi} | |
3607 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and | |
3608 for MS-DOS and Win32 console} | |
3609 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different | |
10 | 3610 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only |
7 | 3611 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by |
3612 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or | |
3613 horizontal cursor. | |
6727 | 3614 For a console the 't_SI', 't_SR', and 't_EI' escape sequences are |
3615 used. | |
7 | 3616 |
10 | 3617 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a |
7 | 3618 mode-list and an argument-list: |
3619 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,.. | |
3620 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes: | |
3621 n Normal mode | |
3622 v Visual mode | |
3623 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
3624 if not specified) | |
3625 o Operator-pending mode | |
3626 i Insert mode | |
3627 r Replace mode | |
3628 c Command-line Normal (append) mode | |
3629 ci Command-line Insert mode | |
3630 cr Command-line Replace mode | |
3631 sm showmatch in Insert mode | |
3632 a all modes | |
3633 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments: | |
3634 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height | |
3635 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width | |
3636 block block cursor, fills the whole character | |
3637 [only one of the above three should be present] | |
3638 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking* | |
3639 blinkon{N} | |
3640 blinkoff{N} | |
3641 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before | |
3642 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that | |
3643 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the | |
3644 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one | |
3645 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The | |
3646 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250". | |
3647 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This | |
3648 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch | |
3649 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only | |
3650 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while | |
3651 executing a command. | |
3652 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see | |
3653 |xterm-blink|. | |
3654 {group-name} | |
3655 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font | |
3656 for the cursor | |
3657 {group-name}/{group-name} | |
3658 Two highlight group names, the first is used when | |
3659 no language mappings are used, the other when they | |
3660 are. |language-mapping| | |
3661 | |
3662 Examples of parts: | |
3663 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a | |
3664 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor" | |
3665 highlight group | |
3666 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150 | |
3667 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a | |
3668 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the | |
3669 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit | |
3670 faster. | |
3671 | |
3672 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for | |
3673 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used | |
3674 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off | |
3675 blinking: "a:blinkon0" | |
3676 | |
3677 Examples of cursor highlighting: > | |
3678 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE | |
3679 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg | |
3680 < | |
3681 *'guifont'* *'gfn'* | |
2908 | 3682 *E235* *E596* |
7 | 3683 'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "") |
3684 global | |
3685 {not in Vi} | |
3686 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3687 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim. | |
3688 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When | |
3689 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other | |
3690 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas. | |
3691 The first valid font is used. | |
8 | 3692 |
170 | 3693 On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is |
3694 not empty, then 'guifont' is not used. | |
8 | 3695 |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3696 Note: As to the GTK GUIs, no error is given against any invalid names, |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3697 and the first element of the list is always picked up and made use of. |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3698 This is because, instead of identifying a given name with a font, the |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3699 GTK GUIs use it to construct a pattern and try to look up a font which |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3700 best matches the pattern among available fonts, and this way, the |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3701 matching never fails. An invalid name doesn't matter because a number |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3702 of font properties other than name will do to get the matching done. |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3703 |
7 | 3704 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name |
3705 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra | |
3706 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also | |
3707 |option-backslash|. For example: > | |
3708 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas | |
8 | 3709 < will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it |
7 | 3710 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead. |
8 | 3711 |
3712 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting. | |
3713 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource | |
3714 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it | |
3715 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in | |
3716 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim | |
3717 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts. | |
3718 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3719 For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: > |
8 | 3720 :set guifont=* |
3721 < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want. | |
3722 | |
3723 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a | |
3724 way to set 'guifont' for various systems. | |
3725 | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3726 For the GTK+ 2 and 3 GUIs, the font name looks like this: > |
7 | 3727 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11 |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3728 < That's all. XLFDs are not used. For Chinese this is reported to work |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3729 well: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3730 if has("gui_gtk2") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3731 set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3732 set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3733 endif |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3734 < |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3735 (Replace gui_gtk2 with gui_gtk3 for the GTK+ 3 GUI) |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3736 |
170 | 3737 For Mac OSX you can use something like this: > |
3738 :set guifont=Monaco:h10 | |
853 | 3739 < Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems. |
3740 *E236* | |
7 | 3741 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3742 width). An exception is GTK: all fonts are accepted, but mono-spaced |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3743 fonts look best. |
8 | 3744 |
7 | 3745 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel" |
3746 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts. | |
8 | 3747 |
7 | 3748 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245* |
3749 - takes these options in the font name: | |
3750 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3751 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3752 b - bold | |
3753 i - italic | |
3754 u - underline | |
3755 s - strikeout | |
233 | 3756 cXX - character set XX. Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC, |
7 | 3757 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK, |
3758 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS, | |
3759 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC. | |
22 | 3760 Normally you would use "cDEFAULT". |
8876
47f17f66da3d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/03413f44167c4b5cd0012def9bb331e2518c83cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8835
diff
changeset
|
3761 qXX - quality XX. Valid quality names are: PROOF, DRAFT, |
9097
071f9da012fb
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/06d2d38ab7564e1f784b1058a4ef4580cd6d1810
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9027
diff
changeset
|
3762 ANTIALIASED, NONANTIALIASED, CLEARTYPE, DEFAULT. |
8835
c1a5623cfc86
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/7c1c6dbb6817640fd3956a0d5417da23fde336d8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8748
diff
changeset
|
3763 Normally you would use "qDEFAULT". |
9887
b4da19b7539f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc1f1645cb495fa6bfbe216d7359f23539a0e25d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9877
diff
changeset
|
3764 Some quality values are not supported in legacy OSs. |
7 | 3765 |
3766 Use a ':' to separate the options. | |
3767 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use | |
3768 backslashes to escape the spaces. | |
3769 - Examples: > | |
3770 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN | |
3771 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5 | |
3772 < See also |font-sizes|. | |
3773 | |
3774 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'* | |
3775 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598* | |
3776 'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "") | |
3777 global | |
3778 {not in Vi} | |
3779 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
3780 with the |+xfontset| feature} | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3781 {not available in the GTK+ GUI} |
7 | 3782 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first |
3783 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See | |
3784 |xfontset|. | |
3785 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as | |
3786 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the | |
3787 |:highlight| command. | |
3788 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the | |
3789 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting | |
3790 'guifontset' will fail. | |
3791 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont' | |
3792 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be | |
3793 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name, | |
3794 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative | |
3795 fontset names. | |
3796 This example works on many X11 systems: > | |
3797 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-* | |
3798 < | |
3799 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534* | |
3800 'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "") | |
3801 global | |
3802 {not in Vi} | |
3803 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3804 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used | |
3805 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is | |
3806 used. | |
3807 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one | |
3808 specified with 'guifont' and the same height. | |
3809 | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3810 All GUI versions but GTK+: |
7 | 3811 |
3812 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and | |
3813 'guifontset' is empty or invalid. | |
3814 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and | |
3815 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching | |
3816 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it. | |
3817 | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3818 GTK+ GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk* |
7 | 3819 |
3820 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width | |
3821 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8". | |
3822 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide' | |
10 | 3823 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the |
7 | 3824 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need |
3825 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice | |
3826 made by Pango/Xft. | |
3827 | |
4055 | 3828 Windows +multibyte only: *guifontwide_win_mbyte* |
3829 | |
4073 | 3830 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is used for IME instead of 'guifont'. |
4055 | 3831 |
7 | 3832 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'* |
3833 'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50) | |
3834 global | |
3835 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI} | |
3836 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting | |
3837 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started, | |
3838 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will | |
10 | 3839 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel |
7 | 3840 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the |
3841 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the | |
3842 screen. | |
3843 | |
3844 *'guioptions'* *'go'* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
3845 'guioptions' 'go' string (default "egmrLtT" (MS-Windows, "t" is |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
3846 removed in |defaults.vim|), |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
3847 "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena), |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
3848 ) |
7 | 3849 global |
3850 {not in Vi} | |
3851 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
8 | 3852 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a |
7 | 3853 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the |
3854 GUI should be used. | |
3855 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3856 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3857 | |
13470
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3858 Valid characters are as follows: |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3859 *'go-!'* |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3860 '!' External commands are executed in a terminal window. Without |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3861 this flag the MS-Windows GUI will open a console window to |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3862 execute the command. The Unix GUI will simulate a dumb |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3863 terminal to list the command output. |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3864 The terminal window will be positioned at the bottom, and grow |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3865 upwards as needed. |
1152 | 3866 *guioptions_a* *'go-a'* |
7 | 3867 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started, |
3868 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of | |
3869 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the | |
3870 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other | |
3871 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode | |
3872 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an | |
3873 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text | |
3874 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register. | |
3875 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other | |
3876 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended. | |
3877 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the | |
3878 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to | |
3879 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register. | |
3880 The same applies to the modeless selection. | |
3674 | 3881 *'go-P'* |
3882 'P' Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "* | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
3883 register. |
1152 | 3884 *'go-A'* |
10 | 3885 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only |
7 | 3886 applies to the modeless selection. |
3887 | |
3888 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~ | |
3889 "" - - | |
3890 "a" yes yes | |
3891 "A" - yes | |
3892 "aA" yes yes | |
3893 | |
1152 | 3894 *'go-c'* |
7 | 3895 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple |
3896 choices. | |
1152 | 3897 *'go-e'* |
697 | 3898 'e' Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'. |
688 | 3899 'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels. |
3900 When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used. | |
857 | 3901 The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently |
1621 | 3902 GTK, Motif, Mac OS/X and MS-Windows. |
1152 | 3903 *'go-f'* |
7 | 3904 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell |
3905 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the | |
3906 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you | |
3907 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the | |
3908 foreground. |gui-fork| | |
3909 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have | |
819 | 3910 happened already when the |gvimrc| file is read. |
1152 | 3911 *'go-i'* |
7 | 3912 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper |
3913 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of | |
3914 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3915 *'go-m'* |
7 | 3916 'm' Menu bar is present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3917 *'go-M'* |
10 | 3918 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note |
7 | 3919 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before |
819 | 3920 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc| |
7 | 3921 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
3922 `:syntax on` and `:filetype on` commands load the menu too). |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3923 *'go-g'* |
7 | 3924 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If |
3925 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all. | |
3926 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items. | |
1152 | 3927 *'go-t'* |
7 | 3928 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32, |
3929 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI. | |
1152 | 3930 *'go-T'* |
236 | 3931 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon |
856 | 3932 and Athena GUIs. |
1152 | 3933 *'go-r'* |
7 | 3934 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3935 *'go-R'* |
7 | 3936 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3937 split window. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3938 *'go-l'* |
7 | 3939 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3940 *'go-L'* |
7 | 3941 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3942 split window. | |
1152 | 3943 *'go-b'* |
7 | 3944 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on |
3945 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h' | |
3946 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3947 *'go-h'* |
7 | 3948 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor |
3949 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
3950 | |
3951 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if | |
3952 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information. | |
3953 | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3954 *'go-v'* |
7 | 3955 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included, |
3956 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a | |
3957 vertical layout is used anyway. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3958 *'go-p'* |
7 | 3959 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some |
3960 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at | |
3961 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done | |
819 | 3962 before starting the GUI. Set it in your |gvimrc|. Adding or |
7 | 3963 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3964 *'go-F'* |
10 | 3965 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|. |
12802
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
3966 *'go-k'* |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
3967 'k' Keep the GUI window size when adding/removing a scrollbar, or |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
3968 toolbar, tabline, etc. Instead, the behavior is similar to |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
3969 when the window is maximized and will adjust 'lines' and |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
3970 'columns' to fit to the window. Without the 'k' flag Vim will |
12865
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
3971 try to keep 'lines' and 'columns' the same when adding and |
12802
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
3972 removing GUI components. |
1152 | 3973 |
7 | 3974 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'* |
3975 'guipty' boolean (default on) | |
3976 global | |
3977 {not in Vi} | |
3978 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3979 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for | |
3980 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|. | |
3981 | |
688 | 3982 *'guitablabel'* *'gtl'* |
3983 'guitablabel' 'gtl' string (default empty) | |
3984 global | |
3985 {not in Vi} | |
692 | 3986 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3987 with the |+windows| feature} |
688 | 3988 When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab |
857 | 3989 pages line. When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a |
3990 default label. See |setting-guitablabel| for more info. | |
688 | 3991 |
692 | 3992 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
839 | 3993 'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below. |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
3994 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
3995 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. |
692 | 3996 |
688 | 3997 Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed. 'e' must be |
3998 present in 'guioptions'. For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is | |
3999 used. | |
4000 | |
839 | 4001 *'guitabtooltip'* *'gtt'* |
4002 'guitabtooltip' 'gtt' string (default empty) | |
4003 global | |
4004 {not in Vi} | |
4005 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4006 with the |+windows| feature} |
839 | 4007 When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab |
4008 pages line. When empty Vim will use a default tooltip. | |
4009 This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4010 You can include a line break. Simplest method is to use |:let|: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4011 :let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two" |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4012 < |
839 | 4013 |
7 | 4014 *'helpfile'* *'hf'* |
4015 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt" | |
4016 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt") | |
4017 global | |
4018 {not in Vi} | |
4019 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be | |
4020 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories | |
4021 in 'runtimepath' will be used. | |
4022 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example: | |
4023 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also | |
10 | 4024 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including |
7 | 4025 spaces and backslashes. |
4026 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4027 security reasons. | |
4028 | |
4029 *'helpheight'* *'hh'* | |
4030 'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20) | |
4031 global | |
4032 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4033 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 4034 feature} |
4035 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the | |
4036 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the | |
4037 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other | |
4038 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is | |
4039 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable. | |
4040 | |
4041 *'helplang'* *'hlg'* | |
4042 'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty) | |
4043 global | |
4044 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| | |
4045 feature} | |
4046 {not in Vi} | |
4047 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language | |
4048 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always | |
4049 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over | |
4050 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that | |
4051 language and not in the English help. | |
4052 Example: > | |
4053 :set helplang=de,it | |
4054 < This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help | |
4055 files. | |
4056 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will | |
4057 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option. | |
4058 See |help-translated|. | |
4059 | |
4060 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'* | |
4061 'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off) | |
4062 global | |
4063 {not in Vi} | |
4064 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a | |
4065 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still | |
4066 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course. | |
4067 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer | |
4068 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is | |
4069 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!' | |
10 | 4070 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|. |
12 | 4071 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option. |
7 | 4072 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|. |
4073 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers. | |
4074 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!". | |
4075 | |
4076 *'highlight'* *'hl'* | |
4077 'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string): | |
9877
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4078 "8:SpecialKey,~:EndOfBuffer,@:NonText, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4079 d:Directory,e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4080 l:Search,m:MoreMsg,M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4081 N:CursorLineNr,r:Question,s:StatusLine, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4082 S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,t:Title, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4083 v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,f:Folded, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4084 F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,C:DiffChange, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4085 D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,>:SignColumn, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4086 B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,R:SpellRare, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4087 L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,+:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel, |
11516
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
4088 x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb,*:TabLine, |
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
4089 #:TabLineSel,_:TabLineFill,!:CursorColumn, |
11914 | 4090 .:CursorLine,o:ColorColumn,q:QuickFixLine, |
12254 | 4091 z:StatusLineTerm,Z:StatusLineTermNC") |
7 | 4092 global |
4093 {not in Vi} | |
4094 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various | |
4095 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The | |
4096 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to | |
10 | 4097 use for that occasion. The occasions are: |
7 | 4098 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map" |
9877
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4099 |hl-EndOfBuffer| ~ lines after the last line in the buffer |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4100 |hl-NonText| @ '@' at the end of the window and |
7 | 4101 characters from 'showbreak' |
4102 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special | |
4103 things in listings | |
4104 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages | |
4105 h (obsolete, ignored) | |
4106 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting | |
4107 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch') | |
4108 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt| | |
4109 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --") | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4110 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4111 when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set. |
4073 | 4112 |hl-CursorLineNr| N like n for when 'cursorline' or 'relativenumber' is |
4113 set. | |
7 | 4114 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |
4115 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line| | |
12785 | 4116 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows |
7 | 4117 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. |
4118 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows | |
4119 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode | |
4120 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the | |
4121 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and | |
4122 |xterm-clipboard|. | |
4123 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages | |
4124 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu' | |
4125 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds | |
4126 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn' | |
386 | 4127 |hl-DiffAdd| A added line in diff mode |
4128 |hl-DiffChange| C changed line in diff mode | |
4129 |hl-DiffDelete| D deleted line in diff mode | |
4130 |hl-DiffText| T inserted text in diff mode | |
7 | 4131 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs| |
221 | 4132 |hl-SpellBad| B misspelled word |spell| |
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2324
diff
changeset
|
4133 |hl-SpellCap| P word that should start with capital |spell| |
221 | 4134 |hl-SpellRare| R rare word |spell| |
4135 |hl-SpellLocal| L word from other region |spell| | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
4136 |hl-Conceal| - the placeholders used for concealed characters |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
4137 (see 'conceallevel') |
540 | 4138 |hl-Pmenu| + popup menu normal line |
4139 |hl-PmenuSel| = popup menu normal line | |
4140 |hl-PmenuSbar| x popup menu scrollbar | |
4141 |hl-PmenuThumb| X popup menu scrollbar thumb | |
7 | 4142 |
4143 The display modes are: | |
4144 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me") | |
4145 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR") | |
4146 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me") | |
4147 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se") | |
4148 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue") | |
205 | 4149 c undercurl (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce") |
12317
2a8890b80923
patch 8.0.1038: strike-through text not supported
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12293
diff
changeset
|
4150 t strikethrough (termcap entry "Ts" and "Te") |
7 | 4151 n no highlighting |
4152 - no highlighting | |
4153 : use a highlight group | |
4154 The default is used for occasions that are not included. | |
4155 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors| | |
4156 for an example. | |
4157 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of | |
4158 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type | |
4159 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to | |
4160 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion. | |
4161 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups. | |
4162 | |
4163 *'history'* *'hi'* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4164 'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 50, Vi default: 0, |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4165 set to 200 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 4166 global |
4167 {not in Vi} | |
4168 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns | |
5991 | 4169 is remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in |
7 | 4170 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|). |
5991 | 4171 The maximum value is 10000. |
7 | 4172 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
4173 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4174 | |
4175 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'* | |
4176 'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off) | |
4177 global | |
4178 {not in Vi} | |
4179 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
4180 feature} | |
4181 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set. | |
4182 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
4183 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|. | |
4184 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4185 | |
4186 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'* | |
4187 'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off) | |
4188 global | |
4189 {not in Vi} | |
4190 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
4191 feature} | |
4192 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on. | |
4193 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard. | |
4194 See |rileft.txt|. | |
4195 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4196 | |
11160 | 4197 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'* |
4198 'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off) | |
4199 global | |
4200 {not in Vi} | |
4201 {not available when compiled without the | |
4202 |+extra_search| feature} | |
4203 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches. | |
4204 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the | |
4205 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by | |
4206 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets | |
4207 are not applied. | |
4208 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|. | |
4209 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it | |
4210 off with |:nohlsearch|. This does not change the option value, as | |
4211 soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back. | |
4212 'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches. | |
4213 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to | |
4214 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the | |
4215 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first | |
4216 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not | |
4217 drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line. | |
4218 You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup | |
4219 with the 'h' flag in 'viminfo' |viminfo-h|. | |
4220 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4221 | |
7 | 4222 *'icon'* *'noicon'* |
4223 'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
4224 global | |
4225 {not in Vi} | |
4226 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
4227 feature} | |
4228 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of | |
4229 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file | |
4230 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used. | |
4231 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option. | |
4232 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently | |
4233 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are | |
4234 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the | |
4235 builtin termcap). | |
4236 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
233 | 4237 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on |
7 | 4238 X11. |
6259 | 4239 For MS-Windows the icon can be changed, see |windows-icon|. |
7 | 4240 |
4241 *'iconstring'* | |
4242 'iconstring' string (default "") | |
4243 global | |
4244 {not in Vi} | |
4245 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
4246 feature} | |
4247 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of | |
4248 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on. | |
4249 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text | |
4250 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option). | |
4251 Does not work for MS Windows. | |
4252 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
4253 restored if possible |X11|. | |
4254 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be | |
10 | 4255 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See |
7 | 4256 'titlestring' for example settings. |
4257 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
4258 | |
4259 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'* | |
4260 'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off) | |
4261 global | |
4262 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags | |
4263 file. | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
4264 Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'. |
7 | 4265 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see |
4266 |/ignorecase|. | |
4267 | |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4268 *'imactivatefunc'* *'imaf'* |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4269 'imactivatefunc' 'imaf' string (default "") |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4270 global |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4271 {not in Vi} |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4272 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4273 feature} |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4274 This option specifies a function that will be called to |
12936
c53a80f39a52
patch 8.0.1344: using 'imactivatefunc' in the GUI does not work
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12934
diff
changeset
|
4275 activate or deactivate the Input Method. |
c53a80f39a52
patch 8.0.1344: using 'imactivatefunc' in the GUI does not work
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12934
diff
changeset
|
4276 It is not used in the GUI. |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4277 |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4278 Example: > |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4279 function ImActivateFunc(active) |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4280 if a:active |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4281 ... do something |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4282 else |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4283 ... do something |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4284 endif |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4285 " return value is not used |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4286 endfunction |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4287 set imactivatefunc=ImActivateFunc |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4288 < |
7 | 4289 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'* |
4290 'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "") | |
4291 global | |
4292 {not in Vi} | |
4293 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and | |
2209
d0ddf7ba1630
Included the patch to support netbeans in a terminal.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2207
diff
changeset
|
4294 |+GUI_GTK|} *E599* |
7 | 4295 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for |
4296 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control | |
4297 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'. | |
4298 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option | |
4299 tells Vim what the key is. | |
4300 Format: | |
4301 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING | |
4302 | |
4303 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored): | |
4304 S Shift key | |
4305 L Lock key | |
4306 C Control key | |
4307 1 Mod1 key | |
4308 2 Mod2 key | |
4309 3 Mod3 key | |
4310 4 Mod4 key | |
4311 5 Mod5 key | |
4312 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are | |
4313 both shift+ctrl+space. | |
4314 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING. | |
4315 | |
4316 Example: > | |
4317 :set imactivatekey=S-space | |
4318 < "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 + | |
4319 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean). | |
4320 | |
4321 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'* | |
4322 'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off) | |
4323 global | |
4324 {not in Vi} | |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4325 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4326 feature} |
7 | 4327 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command |
4328 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that). | |
4329 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering | |
4330 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented | |
4331 characters with dead keys. | |
4332 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4333 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'noimdisable'* *'noimd'* |
7 | 4334 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI)) |
4335 global | |
4336 {not in Vi} | |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4337 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4338 feature} |
7 | 4339 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable |
4340 the IM when it doesn't work properly. | |
4341 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This | |
4342 may change in later releases. | |
4343 | |
4344 *'iminsert'* *'imi'* | |
12469
61d910f0999d
patch 8.0.1114: default for 'iminsert' is annoying
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12317
diff
changeset
|
4345 'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0) |
7 | 4346 local to buffer |
4347 {not in Vi} | |
4348 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in | |
4349 Insert mode. Valid values: | |
4350 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
4351 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
4352 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
4353 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc> | |
4354 this can be used: > | |
4355 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR> | |
4356 < This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert | |
4357 mode. | |
4358 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode | |
4359 |i_CTRL-^|. | |
4360 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name. | |
4361 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f". | |
4362 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
4363 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
4364 | |
12920
327e1264b9bf
patch 8.0.1336: cannot use imactivatefunc() unless compiled with +xim
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12865
diff
changeset
|
4365 You can set 'imactivatefunc' and 'imstatusfunc' to handle IME/XIM |
327e1264b9bf
patch 8.0.1336: cannot use imactivatefunc() unless compiled with +xim
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12865
diff
changeset
|
4366 via external command if vim is not compiled with the |+xim|, |
327e1264b9bf
patch 8.0.1336: cannot use imactivatefunc() unless compiled with +xim
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12865
diff
changeset
|
4367 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime|. |
327e1264b9bf
patch 8.0.1336: cannot use imactivatefunc() unless compiled with +xim
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12865
diff
changeset
|
4368 |
7 | 4369 *'imsearch'* *'ims'* |
12469
61d910f0999d
patch 8.0.1114: default for 'iminsert' is annoying
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12317
diff
changeset
|
4370 'imsearch' 'ims' number (default -1) |
7 | 4371 local to buffer |
4372 {not in Vi} | |
4373 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when | |
4374 entering a search pattern. Valid values: | |
4375 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like | |
4376 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern | |
4377 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
4378 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
4379 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
4380 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode | |
4381 |c_CTRL-^|. | |
4382 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap' | |
4383 option to a valid keymap name. | |
4384 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
4385 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
4386 | |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4387 *'imstatusfunc'* *'imsf'* |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4388 'imstatusfunc' 'imsf' string (default "") |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4389 global |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4390 {not in Vi} |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4391 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4392 feature} |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4393 This option specifies a function that is called to obtain the status |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4394 of Input Method. It must return a positive number when IME is active. |
12936
c53a80f39a52
patch 8.0.1344: using 'imactivatefunc' in the GUI does not work
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12934
diff
changeset
|
4395 It is not used in the GUI. |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4396 |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4397 Example: > |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4398 function ImStatusFunc() |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4399 let is_active = ...do something |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4400 return is_active ? 1 : 0 |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4401 endfunction |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4402 set imstatusfunc=ImStatusFunc |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4403 < |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4404 NOTE: This function is invoked very often. Keep it fast. |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4405 |
12293
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4406 *'imstyle'* *'imst'* |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4407 'imstyle' 'imst' number (default 1) |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4408 global |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4409 {not in Vi} |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4410 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4411 |+GUI_GTK|} |
12499 | 4412 This option specifies the input style of Input Method: |
4413 0 use on-the-spot style | |
4414 1 over-the-spot style | |
12293
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4415 See: |xim-input-style| |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4416 |
12559 | 4417 For a long time on-the-spot style had been used in the GTK version of |
4418 vim, however, it is known that it causes troubles when using mappings, | |
12293
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4419 |single-repeat|, etc. Therefore over-the-spot style becomes the |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4420 default now. This should work fine for most people, however if you |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4421 have any problem with it, try using on-the-spot style. |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4422 |
7 | 4423 *'include'* *'inc'* |
4424 'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include") | |
4425 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
4426 {not in Vi} | |
4427 {not available when compiled without the | |
4428 |+find_in_path| feature} | |
10 | 4429 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search |
7 | 4430 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default |
4431 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i", | |
532 | 4432 "]I", "[d", etc. |
4433 Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that | |
534 | 4434 comes after the matched pattern. But if "\zs" appears in the pattern |
4435 then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it | |
4436 appears, is used as the file name. Use this to include characters | |
4437 that are not in 'isfname', such as a space. You can then use | |
4438 'includeexpr' to process the matched text. | |
532 | 4439 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
7 | 4440 |
4441 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'* | |
4442 'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "") | |
4443 local to buffer | |
4444 {not in Vi} | |
4445 {not available when compiled without the | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4446 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| features} |
7 | 4447 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include' |
10 | 4448 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: > |
7 | 4449 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g') |
4450 < The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected. | |
634 | 4451 |
7 | 4452 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be |
10 | 4453 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement. |
7 | 4454 Also used for |<cfile>|. |
4455 | |
3682 | 4456 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
4457 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 4458 |
4459 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
4460 evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|. | |
4461 | |
7 | 4462 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4463 'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim| if the |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4464 +reltime feature is supported) |
7 | 4465 global |
4466 {not in Vi} | |
4467 {not available when compiled without the | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4468 |+extra_search| features} |
17 | 4469 While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed |
4470 so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern | |
4471 is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated | |
4472 often, this is only useful on fast terminals. | |
4473 Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its | |
4474 original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You | |
4475 still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the | |
4476 cursor to the match. | |
10261
bdd7fc1a38c0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc08328821a2c11e33dfb1980332e4923ec64fca
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10244
diff
changeset
|
4477 You can use the CTRL-G and CTRL-T keys to move to the next and |
bdd7fc1a38c0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc08328821a2c11e33dfb1980332e4923ec64fca
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10244
diff
changeset
|
4478 previous match. |c_CTRL-G| |c_CTRL-T| |
1521 | 4479 When compiled with the |+reltime| feature Vim only searches for about |
4480 half a second. With a complicated pattern and/or a lot of text the | |
4481 match may not be found. This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you | |
4482 are typing the pattern. | |
17 | 4483 The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'. |
12968 | 4484 When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while |
4485 typing a search command. See also: 'hlsearch'. | |
12720
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4486 If you don't want turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all matches |
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4487 while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with autocmd. |
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4488 Example: > |
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4489 augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight |
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4490 autocmd! |
12744
0c704288ced4
patch 8.0.1250: 'hlsearch' highlighting not removed after incsearch
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12720
diff
changeset
|
4491 autocmd CmdlineEnter /,\? :set hlsearch |
0c704288ced4
patch 8.0.1250: 'hlsearch' highlighting not removed after incsearch
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12720
diff
changeset
|
4492 autocmd CmdlineLeave /,\? :set nohlsearch |
12720
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4493 augroup END |
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4494 < |
772 | 4495 CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match |
2302
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4496 to the command line. If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the |
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4497 command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is |
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4498 converted to lowercase. |
772 | 4499 CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current |
4500 match, excluding the characters that were already typed. | |
7 | 4501 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
4502 | |
4503 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'* | |
4504 'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "") | |
4505 local to buffer | |
4506 {not in Vi} | |
4507 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
4508 or |+eval| features} | |
4509 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line. | |
4510 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and | |
4511 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option. | |
4512 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and | |
2833 | 4513 'smartindent' indenting. When 'lisp' is set, this option is |
4514 overridden by the Lisp indentation algorithm. | |
7 | 4515 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting. |
4516 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for | |
534 | 4517 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also in this line |
7 | 4518 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around). |
4519 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It | |
4520 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is | |
4521 used for the indent). | |
4522 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()| | |
4523 and |lispindent()|. | |
4524 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must | |
4525 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the | |
4526 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved. | |
4527 Normally this option would be set to call a function: > | |
4528 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent() | |
4529 < Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains | |
4530 "msg". | |
634 | 4531 See |indent-expression|. |
11160 | 4532 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 4533 |
3682 | 4534 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
4535 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 4536 |
4537 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
4538 evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|. | |
4539 | |
4540 | |
7 | 4541 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'* |
4542 'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
4543 local to buffer | |
4544 {not in Vi} | |
4545 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
4546 feature} | |
4547 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
4548 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty. | |
4549 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|. | |
4550 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|. | |
4551 | |
4552 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'* | |
4553 'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off) | |
4554 local to buffer | |
4555 {not in Vi} | |
4556 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and | |
1621 | 4557 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending |
4558 on the typed text. If the typed text contains a lowercase letter | |
4559 where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made | |
4560 lowercase. If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match | |
4561 has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter, | |
4562 and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase. | |
4563 With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is. | |
7 | 4564 |
4565 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'* | |
4566 'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off) | |
4567 global | |
4568 {not in Vi} | |
4569 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful | |
4570 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|. | |
4571 These Insert mode commands will be useful: | |
4572 - Use the cursor keys to move around. | |
9887
b4da19b7539f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc1f1645cb495fa6bfbe216d7359f23539a0e25d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9877
diff
changeset
|
4573 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|. When |
7 | 4574 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off. |
4575 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished. | |
4576 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use | |
477 | 4577 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode. Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor |
4578 left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set. |i_CTRL-L| | |
7 | 4579 |
4580 These items change when 'insertmode' is set: | |
4581 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode. | |
4582 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps. | |
4583 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode. | |
4584 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted. | |
4585 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z* | |
4586 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like | |
4587 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same | |
4588 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set. | |
4589 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used. | |
4590 | |
4591 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4592 | |
4593 *'isfname'* *'isf'* | |
4594 'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4595 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,=" | |
4596 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:" | |
4597 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~" | |
4598 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=" | |
4599 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=") | |
4600 global | |
4601 {not in Vi} | |
4602 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and | |
4603 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in | |
10 | 4604 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|. |
7 | 4605 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the |
4606 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. | |
4607 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well. | |
1621 | 4608 Think twice before adding white space to this option. Although a |
4609 space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim | |
4610 doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion. | |
4611 It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'. | |
7 | 4612 |
4613 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to | |
4614 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit | |
4615 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special | |
4616 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file | |
4617 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The | |
4618 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for | |
4619 cmd.exe. | |
4620 | |
4621 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas. | |
10 | 4622 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two |
4623 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a | |
7 | 4624 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does |
4625 not work for digits). Example: | |
4626 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range | |
4627 128 to 140 and '#' to 43) | |
4628 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range | |
4629 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left | |
4630 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is | |
4631 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the | |
4632 option or the end of a range. Example: | |
4633 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^') | |
4634 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE | |
4635 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z, | |
4636 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples: | |
4637 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower | |
1621 | 4638 case ASCII letters. |
7 | 4639 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character. |
4640 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is | |
4641 expected. Example: | |
4642 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore. | |
4643 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example: | |
4644 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding | |
4645 comma, plus <Tab>. | |
4646 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4647 | |
4648 *'isident'* *'isi'* | |
4649 'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4650 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4651 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255") | |
4652 global | |
4653 {not in Vi} | |
4654 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers. | |
4655 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a | |
4656 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a | |
233 | 4657 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this |
7 | 4658 option. |
4659 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding | |
10 | 4660 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to |
7 | 4661 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead. |
4662 | |
4663 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'* | |
4664 'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32: | |
4665 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4666 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255" | |
4667 Vi default: "@,48-57,_") | |
4668 local to buffer | |
4669 {not in Vi} | |
4670 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands: | |
10 | 4671 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See |
7 | 4672 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C |
4673 programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>". | |
4674 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except | |
4675 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that | |
4676 command). | |
4677 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included. | |
7687
61354fabf8a2
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b8060fe862f684b591f9ac679eac5b2594d6c5a0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7538
diff
changeset
|
4678 This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax |
61354fabf8a2
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b8060fe862f684b591f9ac679eac5b2594d6c5a0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7538
diff
changeset
|
4679 uses |:syn-iskeyword|. |
7 | 4680 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
4681 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4682 | |
4683 *'isprint'* *'isp'* | |
4684 'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh: | |
4685 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255") | |
4686 global | |
4687 {not in Vi} | |
4688 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the | |
4689 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from | |
4690 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly, | |
4691 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See | |
4692 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. | |
4693 | |
4694 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters: | |
4695 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_" | |
4696 32 - 126 always single characters | |
4697 127 "^?" | |
4698 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_" | |
4699 160 - 254 "| " - "|~" | |
4700 255 "~?" | |
4701 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are | |
4702 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte. | |
4703 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are | |
4704 displayed as <xx>. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4705 The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4706 |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 4707 |
4708 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the | |
4709 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character | |
4710 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a | |
4711 replacement character will be shown. | |
4712 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>. | |
4713 There is no option to specify these characters. | |
4714 | |
4715 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'* | |
4716 'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on) | |
4717 global | |
4718 {not in Vi} | |
4719 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command. | |
4720 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'. | |
4721 Otherwise only one space is inserted. | |
4722 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
4723 | |
4724 *'key'* | |
4725 'key' string (default "") | |
4726 local to buffer | |
4727 {not in Vi} | |
2283
7e1bd501306d
Mainly documentation updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2265
diff
changeset
|
4728 {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| |
7e1bd501306d
Mainly documentation updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2265
diff
changeset
|
4729 feature} |
7 | 4730 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer. |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
4731 See |encryption| and 'cryptmethod'. |
7 | 4732 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed |
4733 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: > | |
4734 :set key= | |
4735 < It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or | |
4736 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't | |
4737 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it, | |
4738 be careful not to make a typing error! | |
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
4739 You can use "&key" in an expression to detect whether encryption is |
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
4740 enabled. When 'key' is set it returns "*****" (five stars). |
7 | 4741 |
4742 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544* | |
4743 'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "") | |
4744 local to buffer | |
4745 {not in Vi} | |
4746 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap| | |
4747 feature} | |
4748 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|. | |
4749 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of | |
4750 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective. | |
4751 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1 | |
36 | 4752 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4753 |
4754 *'keymodel'* *'km'* | |
4755 'keymodel' 'km' string (default "") | |
4756 global | |
4757 {not in Vi} | |
4758 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys | |
4759 can do. These values can be used: | |
4760 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either | |
4761 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being | |
4762 present in 'selectmode'). | |
4763 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection. | |
4764 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>, | |
4765 <PageUp> and <PageDown>. | |
4766 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
4767 | |
4768 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'* | |
4769 'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help", | |
9098
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4770 VMS: "help") |
7 | 4771 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
4772 {not in Vi} | |
4773 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are | |
4774 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal | |
4775 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty | |
4776 value did this, which is now deprecated.) | |
9098
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4777 When the first character is ":", the command is invoked as a Vim |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4778 Ex command prefixed with [count]. |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4779 When "man", "man -s" or an Ex command is used, Vim will automatically |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4780 translate a count for the "K" command and pass it as the first |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4781 argument. For "man -s" the "-s" is removed when there is no count. |
7 | 4782 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
4783 Example: > | |
4784 :set keywordprg=man\ -s | |
4785 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4786 security reasons. | |
4787 | |
4788 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358* | |
4789 'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "") | |
4790 global | |
4791 {not in Vi} | |
4792 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| | |
4793 feature} | |
4794 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language | |
10 | 4795 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
4796 inserted directly. When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes |
7 | 4797 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning |
4798 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to | |
4799 be able to execute Normal mode commands. | |
4800 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are | |
4801 mapped in Insert mode. | |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4802 Also consider resetting 'langremap' to avoid 'langmap' applies to |
6369 | 4803 characters resulting from a mapping. |
5908 | 4804 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
4805 security reasons. | |
7 | 4806 |
699 | 4807 Example (for Greek, in UTF-8): *greek* > |
4808 :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz | |
7 | 4809 < Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): > |
4810 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ | |
4811 < | |
4812 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each | |
4813 part can be in one of two forms: | |
4814 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately | |
4815 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC". | |
4816 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to" | |
4817 characters. Example: "abc;ABC" | |
4818 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE" | |
4819 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are | |
4820 ";", ',' and backslash itself. | |
4821 | |
4822 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch | |
4823 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will | |
4824 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the | |
4825 langmap mappings) in the following cases: | |
4826 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings) | |
4827 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R | |
4828 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings | |
4829 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by | |
4830 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time | |
4831 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings. | |
4832 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time! | |
4833 | |
4834 *'langmenu'* *'lm'* | |
4835 'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "") | |
4836 global | |
4837 {not in Vi} | |
4838 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and | |
4839 |+multi_lang| features} | |
4840 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded | |
4841 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': > | |
4842 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim" | |
4843 < (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no | |
4844 matter what $LANG is set to: > | |
4845 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1 | |
4846 < When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used. | |
36 | 4847 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4848 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use |
4849 the English menus: > | |
4850 :set langmenu=none | |
4851 < This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype | |
4852 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting | |
4853 this option has no effect. But you could do this: > | |
4854 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim | |
4855 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1 | |
4856 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim | |
4857 < Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself! | |
4858 | |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
4859 *'langnoremap'* *'lnr'* *'nolangnoremap'* *'nolnr'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4860 'langnoremap' 'lnr' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
6339 | 4861 global |
4862 {not in Vi} | |
4863 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| | |
4864 feature} | |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4865 This is just like 'langremap' but with the value inverted. It only |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4866 exists for backwards compatibility. When setting 'langremap' then |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4867 'langnoremap' is set to the inverted value, and the other way around. |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4868 |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4869 *'langremap'* *'lrm'* *'nolangremap'* *'nolrm'* |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4870 'langremap' 'lrm' boolean (default on, reset in |defaults.vim|) |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4871 global |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4872 {not in Vi} |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4873 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4874 feature} |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4875 When off, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting from |
6339 | 4876 a mapping. This basically means, if you noticed that setting |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4877 'langmap' disables some of your mappings, try resetting this option. |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4878 This option defaults to on for backwards compatibility. Set it off if |
6339 | 4879 that works for you to avoid mappings to break. |
4880 | |
7 | 4881 *'laststatus'* *'ls'* |
4882 'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1) | |
4883 global | |
4884 {not in Vi} | |
4885 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a | |
4886 status line: | |
4887 0: never | |
4888 1: only if there are at least two windows | |
4889 2: always | |
4890 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several | |
4891 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line| | |
4892 | |
4893 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'* | |
4894 'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off) | |
4895 global | |
4896 {not in Vi} | |
4897 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while | |
4898 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been | |
10 | 4899 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an |
7 | 4900 update use |:redraw|. |
4901 | |
4902 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'* | |
4903 'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off) | |
4904 local to window | |
4905 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4906 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 4907 feature} |
6009 | 4908 If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather |
7 | 4909 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike |
4910 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file, | |
6009 | 4911 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. |
4912 If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented. Then, the value | |
4913 of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. This option | |
6026 | 4914 is not used when the 'wrap' option is off. |
7 | 4915 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed |
4916 with the right amount of white space. | |
4917 | |
4918 *'lines'* *E593* | |
4919 'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height) | |
4920 global | |
4921 Number of lines of the Vim window. | |
4922 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the | |
161 | 4923 terminal initialization code. Also see |posix-screen-size|. |
7 | 4924 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
4925 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
4926 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
4927 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can | |
4928 use this command to get the tallest window possible: > | |
4929 :set lines=999 | |
571 | 4930 < Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000. |
9887
b4da19b7539f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc1f1645cb495fa6bfbe216d7359f23539a0e25d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9877
diff
changeset
|
4931 If you get fewer lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option. |
7 | 4932 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical |
4933 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up. | |
4934 | |
4935 *'linespace'* *'lsp'* | |
4936 'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI) | |
4937 global | |
4938 {not in Vi} | |
4939 {only in the GUI} | |
4940 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font | |
4941 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other. | |
4942 When non-zero there is room for underlining. | |
180 | 4943 With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have |
4944 space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set | |
4945 'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems | |
4946 though! | |
7 | 4947 |
4948 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'* | |
4949 'lisp' boolean (default off) | |
4950 local to buffer | |
4951 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
4952 feature} | |
4953 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for | |
4954 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with | |
4955 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p' | |
4956 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or | |
4957 better. Also see 'lispwords'. | |
4958 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the | |
4959 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than | |
4960 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty. | |
4961 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
4962 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently} | |
4963 | |
4964 *'lispwords'* *'lw'* | |
4965 'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long) | |
5712 | 4966 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 4967 {not in Vi} |
4968 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
4969 feature} | |
4970 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting. | |
4971 |'lisp'| | |
4972 | |
4973 *'list'* *'nolist'* | |
4974 'list' boolean (default off) | |
4975 local to window | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4976 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4977 line. Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4978 trailing blanks. Further changed by the 'listchars' option. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4979 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4980 The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4981 occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode. To get this cursor |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4982 position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: > |
5161
f7add3891e95
Updated runtime files. Fix NL translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5146
diff
changeset
|
4983 :set list lcs=tab:\ \ |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4984 < |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4985 Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4986 or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for |
7 | 4987 changing the way tabs are displayed. |
4988 | |
4989 *'listchars'* *'lcs'* | |
4990 'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$") | |
4991 global | |
4992 {not in Vi} | |
2458 | 4993 Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command. It is a |
4994 comma separated list of string settings. | |
6777 | 4995 *lcs-eol* |
7 | 4996 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When |
4997 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the | |
4998 line. | |
6777 | 4999 *lcs-tab* |
1263 | 5000 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a tab. The first |
7 | 5001 char is used once. The second char is repeated to |
1263 | 5002 fill the space that the tab normally occupies. |
5003 "tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as | |
5004 ">---". When omitted, a tab is show as ^I. | |
6777 | 5005 *lcs-space* |
5006 space:c Character to show for a space. When omitted, spaces | |
5007 are left blank. | |
5008 *lcs-trail* | |
10 | 5009 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted, |
6777 | 5010 trailing spaces are blank. Overrides the "space" |
5011 setting for trailing spaces. | |
5012 *lcs-extends* | |
7 | 5013 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is |
5014 off and the line continues beyond the right of the | |
5015 screen. | |
6777 | 5016 *lcs-precedes* |
7 | 5017 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap' |
5018 is off and there is text preceding the character | |
5019 visible in the first column. | |
6777 | 5020 *lcs-conceal* |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
5021 conceal:c Character to show in place of concealed text, when |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
5022 'conceallevel' is set to 1. |
6777 | 5023 *lcs-nbsp* |
6801 | 5024 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space character |
5025 (0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F). Left blank when | |
5026 omitted. | |
7 | 5027 |
10 | 5028 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can |
7 | 5029 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable |
819 | 5030 characters are allowed. All characters must be single width. |
7 | 5031 |
5032 Examples: > | |
5033 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:- | |
12 | 5034 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:% |
7 | 5035 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:< |
5036 < The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and | |
6777 | 5037 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "space", "tab" and "trail". |
1152 | 5038 |hl-NonText| |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 5039 |
5040 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'* | |
5041 'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on) | |
5042 global | |
5043 {not in Vi} | |
5044 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|. | |
5045 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading | |
5046 of plugins. | |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
5047 Note that using the "-u NONE", "-u DEFAULTS" and "--noplugin" command |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
5048 line arguments reset this option. See |-u| and |--noplugin|. |
7 | 5049 |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5050 *'luadll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
5051 'luadll' string (default depends on the build) |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5052 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5053 {not in Vi} |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5054 {only available when compiled with the |+lua/dyn| |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5055 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5056 Specifies the name of the Lua shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5057 DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
5058 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5059 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5060 security reasons. |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5061 |
842 | 5062 *'macatsui'* *'nomacatsui'* |
5063 'macatsui' boolean (default on) | |
5064 global | |
5065 {only available in Mac GUI version} | |
5066 This is a workaround for when drawing doesn't work properly. When set | |
5067 and compiled with multi-byte support ATSUI text drawing is used. When | |
5068 not set ATSUI text drawing is not used. Switch this option off when | |
5069 you experience drawing problems. In a future version the problems may | |
5070 be solved and this option becomes obsolete. Therefore use this method | |
5071 to unset it: > | |
5072 if exists('&macatsui') | |
5073 set nomacatsui | |
5074 endif | |
1152 | 5075 < Another option to check if you have drawing problems is |
5076 'termencoding'. | |
5077 | |
7 | 5078 *'magic'* *'nomagic'* |
5079 'magic' boolean (default on) | |
5080 global | |
5081 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns. | |
5082 See |pattern|. | |
10140
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5083 WARNING: Switching this option off most likely breaks plugins! That |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5084 is because many patterns assume it's on and will fail when it's off. |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5085 Only switch it off when working with old Vi scripts. In any other |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5086 situation write patterns that work when 'magic' is on. Include "\M" |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5087 when you want to |/\M|. |
7 | 5088 |
5089 *'makeef'* *'mef'* | |
5090 'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "") | |
5091 global | |
5092 {not in Vi} | |
5093 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
5094 feature} | |
5095 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|) | |
5096 and the |:grep| command. | |
5097 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used. | |
5098 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name | |
5099 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an | |
5100 existing file. | |
5101 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that. | |
5102 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5103 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
5104 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5105 security reasons. | |
5106 | |
11063
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5107 *'makeencoding'* *'menc'* |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5108 'makeencoding' 'menc' string (default "") |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5109 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5110 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5111 feature} |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5112 {not in Vi} |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5113 Encoding used for reading the output of external commands. When empty, |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5114 encoding is not converted. |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5115 This is used for `:make`, `:lmake`, `:grep`, `:lgrep`, `:grepadd`, |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5116 `:lgrepadd`, `:cfile`, `:cgetfile`, `:caddfile`, `:lfile`, `:lgetfile`, |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5117 and `:laddfile`. |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5118 |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5119 This would be mostly useful when you use MS-Windows and set 'encoding' |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5120 to "utf-8". If |+iconv| is enabled and GNU libiconv is used, setting |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5121 'makeencoding' to "char" has the same effect as setting to the system |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5122 locale encoding. Example: > |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5123 :set encoding=utf-8 |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5124 :set makeencoding=char " system locale is used |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5125 < |
7 | 5126 *'makeprg'* *'mp'* |
5127 'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS") | |
5128 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
5129 {not in Vi} | |
1152 | 5130 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
5131 This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see |:_%| and |:_#|), |
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
5132 which are expanded to the current and alternate file name. Use |::S| |
5690 | 5133 to escape file names in case they contain special characters. |
1152 | 5134 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
5135 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
5136 Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for | |
5137 the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter called | |
5138 "myfilter" do it like this: > | |
7 | 5139 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter |
5140 < The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify | |
5141 where the arguments will be included, for example: > | |
5142 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*} | |
5143 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5144 security reasons. | |
5145 | |
5146 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'* | |
5147 'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]") | |
5148 local to buffer | |
5149 {not in Vi} | |
5150 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the | |
4073 | 5151 other. |
5152 Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot | |
5153 jump between two double quotes. | |
5154 The characters must be separated by a colon. | |
1152 | 5155 The pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and |
5156 '>' (HTML): > | |
7 | 5157 :set mps+=<:> |
5158 | |
5159 < A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an | |
5160 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: > | |
5161 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:; | |
5162 | |
5163 < For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in | |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
5164 the $VIMRUNTIME/pack/dist/opt/matchit directory. |add-local-help| |
7 | 5165 |
5166 *'matchtime'* *'mat'* | |
5167 'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5) | |
5168 global | |
5169 {not in Vi}{in Nvi} | |
5170 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is | |
5171 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that | |
5172 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi. | |
5173 | |
714 | 5174 *'maxcombine'* *'mco'* |
5175 'maxcombine' 'mco' number (default 2) | |
5176 global | |
5177 {not in Vi} | |
5178 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
5179 feature} | |
5180 The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying. | |
5181 Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8". | |
5182 The default is OK for most languages. Hebrew may require 4. | |
5183 Maximum value is 6. | |
5184 Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more | |
5185 combining characters, you just can't see them. Use |g8| or |ga|. | |
5186 See |mbyte-combining|. | |
5187 | |
7 | 5188 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'* |
5189 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100) | |
5190 global | |
5191 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5192 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
1152 | 5193 feature} |
7 | 5194 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally |
5195 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with | |
5196 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use | |
5197 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted. | |
10498
883396809b45
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/bc2eada5424bff06f7eb77c032ecc067da52b846
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10449
diff
changeset
|
5198 Increasing this limit above 200 also changes the maximum for Ex |
14006 | 5199 command recursion, see |E169|. |
7 | 5200 See also |:function|. |
5201 | |
5202 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223* | |
5203 'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000) | |
5204 global | |
5205 {not in Vi} | |
5206 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a | |
5207 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like | |
5208 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg", | |
5209 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also | |
5210 |key-mapping|. | |
5211 | |
5212 *'maxmem'* *'mm'* | |
5213 'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system | |
5214 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
5215 available) | |
5216 global | |
5217 {not in Vi} | |
5218 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this | |
5219 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause | |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5220 other memory to be freed. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5221 The maximum usable value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5222 limit. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5223 The value is ignored when 'swapfile' is off. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5224 Also see 'maxmemtot'. |
7 | 5225 |
189 | 5226 *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'* |
5227 'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000) | |
5228 global | |
5229 {not in Vi} | |
5230 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5231 The maximum value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. |
189 | 5232 *E363* |
1152 | 5233 When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly |
5234 behaves like CTRL-C was typed. | |
189 | 5235 Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very |
5236 inefficient or too complex. This may already happen with the pattern | |
5237 "\(.\)*" on a very long line. ".*" works much better. | |
14298
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5238 Might also happen on redraw, when syntax rules try to match a complex |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5239 text structure. |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5240 Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit, in |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5241 which case you get an "Out of memory" error instead. |
189 | 5242 |
7 | 5243 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'* |
5244 'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system | |
5245 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
5246 available) | |
5247 global | |
5248 {not in Vi} | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5249 Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5250 The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte). Use this to work |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5251 without a limit. |
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5252 On 64 bit machines higher values might work. But hey, do you really |
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5253 need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing? Keep in mind that text is |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
5254 stored in the swap file, one can edit files > 2 Gbyte anyway. We do |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5255 need the memory to store undo info. |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5256 Buffers with 'swapfile' off still count to the total amount of memory |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5257 used. |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5258 Also see 'maxmem'. |
7 | 5259 |
5260 *'menuitems'* *'mis'* | |
5261 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25) | |
5262 global | |
5263 {not in Vi} | |
5264 {not available when compiled without the |+menu| | |
5265 feature} | |
5266 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are | |
5267 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this | |
5268 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first. | |
5269 | |
484 | 5270 *'mkspellmem'* *'msm'* |
5271 'mkspellmem' 'msm' string (default "460000,2000,500") | |
5272 global | |
5273 {not in Vi} | |
5274 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
5275 feature} | |
5276 Parameters for |:mkspell|. This tunes when to start compressing the | |
5277 word tree. Compression can be slow when there are many words, but | |
5278 it's needed to avoid running out of memory. The amount of memory used | |
5279 per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why | |
5280 this tuning is complicated. | |
5281 | |
5282 There are three numbers, separated by commas: | |
5283 {start},{inc},{added} | |
5284 | |
5285 For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory. {start} | |
5286 gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any | |
5287 compression is done. It should be a bit smaller than the amount of | |
5288 memory that is available to Vim. | |
5289 | |
5290 When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the | |
5291 amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another | |
5292 compression is done. A low number means compression is done after | |
5293 less words are added, which is slow. A high number means more memory | |
5294 will be allocated. | |
5295 | |
5296 After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before | |
5297 the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra | |
5298 amount of memory is needed. A low number means there is a smaller | |
5299 chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's | |
5300 slower. | |
5301 | |
5302 The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and | |
5303 Hungarian. The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte. If | |
5304 you have 1 Gbyte you could use: > | |
5305 :set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800 | |
5306 < If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some | |
5307 languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to. | |
5308 | |
7 | 5309 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'* |
1111 | 5310 'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on (off for root), |
5311 Vi default: off) | |
7 | 5312 local to buffer |
5313 *'modelines'* *'mls'* | |
5314 'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5) | |
5315 global | |
5316 {not in Vi} | |
5317 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is | |
5318 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero | |
5319 no lines are checked. See |modeline|. | |
5320 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
5321 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
5322 | |
5323 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'* | |
5324 'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on) | |
5325 local to buffer | |
5326 {not in Vi} *E21* | |
5327 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and | |
5328 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed. | |
10617 | 5329 Can be reset on startup with the |-M| command line argument. |
7 | 5330 |
5331 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'* | |
5332 'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off) | |
5333 local to buffer | |
5334 {not in Vi} | |
5335 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set | |
5336 when: | |
5337 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the | |
5338 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the | |
5339 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the | |
5340 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from | |
5341 when it was written. | |
5342 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original | |
5343 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or | |
5344 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original | |
5345 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be | |
5346 reset. | |
8748
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
5347 Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'. |
3082 | 5348 This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the |
5349 result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost, | |
5350 FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event. See |gzip-example| for | |
5351 an explanation. | |
7 | 5352 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but |
5353 will be ignored. | |
13437 | 5354 Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set |
5355 when using "rA" on an "A". | |
7 | 5356 |
5357 *'more'* *'nomore'* | |
5358 'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
5359 global | |
5360 {not in Vi} | |
5361 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get | |
5362 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the | |
5363 listing continues until finished. | |
5364 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
5365 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
5366 | |
5367 *'mouse'* *E538* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5368 'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32, |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5369 set to "a" in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 5370 global |
5371 {not in Vi} | |
5372 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals | |
1621 | 5373 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, *BSD console with |
5374 sysmouse and Linux console with gpm). For using the mouse in the | |
5375 GUI, see |gui-mouse|. | |
7 | 5376 The mouse can be enabled for different modes: |
12826 | 5377 n Normal mode and Terminal modes |
7 | 5378 v Visual mode |
5379 i Insert mode | |
5380 c Command-line mode | |
5381 h all previous modes when editing a help file | |
5382 a all previous modes | |
5383 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt | |
5384 Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: > | |
5385 :set mouse=a | |
5386 < When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for | |
5387 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor. | |
5388 | |
5389 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|. | |
5390 | |
5391 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the | |
10 | 5392 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of |
7 | 5393 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed. |
5394 Also see the 'clipboard' option. | |
5395 | |
5396 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'* | |
5397 'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off) | |
5398 global | |
5399 {not in Vi} | |
5400 {only works in the GUI} | |
5401 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated. | |
5402 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the | |
5403 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the | |
5404 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as | |
5405 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally. | |
5406 | |
5407 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'* | |
5408 'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on) | |
5409 global | |
5410 {not in Vi} | |
5411 {only works in the GUI} | |
5412 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed. | |
5413 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved. | |
5414 | |
5415 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'* | |
5416 'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32) | |
5417 global | |
5418 {not in Vi} | |
5419 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what | |
5420 the right mouse button is used for: | |
5421 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works | |
5422 like in an xterm. | |
5423 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left | |
5424 mouse button extends a selection. This works like | |
233 | 5425 with Microsoft Windows. |
7 | 5426 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the |
5427 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the | |
5428 selected operation will act upon the clicked object. | |
5429 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will | |
233 | 5430 be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move. This implies of |
7 | 5431 course, that right clicking outside a selection will |
5432 end Visual mode. | |
5433 Overview of what button does what for each model: | |
5434 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~ | |
5435 left click place cursor place cursor | |
5436 left drag start selection start selection | |
5437 shift-left search word extend selection | |
5438 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor) | |
5439 right drag extend selection - | |
5440 middle click paste paste | |
5441 | |
5442 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu. | |
5443 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|. | |
13437 | 5444 In a terminal the popup menu works if Vim is compiled with the |
5445 |+insert_expand| option. | |
7 | 5446 |
5447 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings. | |
5448 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless | |
5449 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly). | |
5450 | |
5451 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
5452 | |
5453 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547* | |
5454 'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross, | |
233 | 5455 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow") |
7 | 5456 global |
5457 {not in Vi} | |
5458 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape| | |
5459 feature} | |
5460 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in | |
5461 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much | |
5462 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list | |
5463 and an argument-list: | |
5464 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,.. | |
5465 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations: | |
5466 In a normal window: ~ | |
5467 n Normal mode | |
5468 v Visual mode | |
5469 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
5470 if not specified) | |
5471 o Operator-pending mode | |
5472 i Insert mode | |
5473 r Replace mode | |
5474 | |
5475 Others: ~ | |
5476 c appending to the command-line | |
5477 ci inserting in the command-line | |
5478 cr replacing in the command-line | |
5479 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts | |
5480 ml idem, but cursor in the last line | |
5481 e any mode, pointer below last window | |
5482 s any mode, pointer on a status line | |
5483 sd any mode, while dragging a status line | |
5484 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line | |
5485 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line | |
5486 a everywhere | |
5487 | |
5488 The shape is one of the following: | |
5489 avail name looks like ~ | |
5490 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer | |
5491 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!) | |
5492 w x beam I-beam | |
5493 w x updown up-down sizing arrows | |
5494 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows | |
5495 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer | |
5496 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer | |
5497 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing | |
5498 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing | |
5499 x crosshair like a big thin + | |
5500 x hand1 black hand | |
5501 x hand2 white hand | |
5502 x pencil what you write with | |
5503 x question big ? | |
5504 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up | |
5505 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up | |
5506 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h) | |
5507 | |
5508 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32, | |
5509 x for X11. | |
5510 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse | |
5511 pointer. | |
5512 | |
5513 Example: > | |
5514 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no | |
5515 < will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and | |
5516 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since | |
5517 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.) | |
5518 | |
5519 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'* | |
5520 'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500) | |
5521 global | |
5522 {not in Vi} | |
5523 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum | |
5524 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be | |
5525 recognized as a multi click. | |
5526 | |
12608
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5527 *'mzschemedll'* |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5528 'mzschemedll' string (default depends on the build) |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5529 global |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5530 {not in Vi} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5531 {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn| |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5532 feature} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5533 Specifies the name of the MzScheme shared library. The default is |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5534 DYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL which was specified at compile time. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5535 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
12785 | 5536 The value must be set in the |vimrc| script or earlier. In the |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
5537 startup, before the |load-plugins| step. |
12608
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5538 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5539 security reasons. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5540 |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5541 *'mzschemegcdll'* |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5542 'mzschemegcdll' string (default depends on the build) |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5543 global |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5544 {not in Vi} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5545 {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn| |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5546 feature} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5547 Specifies the name of the MzScheme GC shared library. The default is |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5548 DYNAMIC_MZGC_DLL which was specified at compile time. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5549 The value can be equal to 'mzschemedll' if it includes the GC code. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5550 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5551 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5552 security reasons. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5553 |
14 | 5554 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'* |
5555 'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100) | |
5556 global | |
5557 {not in Vi} | |
5558 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme| | |
5559 feature} | |
5560 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads. | |
5561 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling. | |
11160 | 5562 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
5563 is reset. | |
14 | 5564 |
7 | 5565 *'nrformats'* *'nf'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5566 'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "bin,octal,hex", |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5567 set to "bin,hex" in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 5568 local to buffer |
5569 {not in Vi} | |
5570 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the | |
5571 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number | |
5572 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands. | |
625 | 5573 alpha If included, single alphabetical characters will be |
7 | 5574 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
5575 letter index a), b), etc. *octal-nrformats* |
625 | 5576 octal If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered |
7 | 5577 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010". |
625 | 5578 hex If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be |
7 | 5579 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on |
5580 "0x100" results in "0x0ff". | |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5581 bin If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5582 considered to be binary. Example: Using CTRL-X on |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5583 "0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111". |
7 | 5584 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always |
5585 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not | |
5586 recognized as octal or hex. | |
5587 | |
5588 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'* | |
5589 'number' 'nu' boolean (default off) | |
5590 local to window | |
5591 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is | |
5592 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of | |
5593 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set). | |
13 | 5594 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
5595 number. | |
7 | 5596 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
5597 characters are put before the number. | |
3445 | 5598 See |hl-LineNr| and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for |
5599 the number. | |
4780 | 5600 *number_relativenumber* |
5601 The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be | |
5602 relative to the cursor. Together with 'number' there are these | |
5603 four combinations (cursor in line 3): | |
5604 | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
5605 'nonu' 'nu' 'nonu' 'nu' |
4780 | 5606 'nornu' 'nornu' 'rnu' 'rnu' |
5607 | |
5608 |apple | 1 apple | 2 apple | 2 apple | |
5609 |pear | 2 pear | 1 pear | 1 pear | |
5610 |nobody | 3 nobody | 0 nobody |3 nobody | |
5611 |there | 4 there | 1 there | 1 there | |
7 | 5612 |
13 | 5613 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'* |
5614 'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8) | |
5615 local to window | |
14 | 5616 {not in Vi} |
5617 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak| | |
5618 feature} | |
13 | 5619 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5620 when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5621 with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5622 the text, there is one less character for the number itself. |
13 | 5623 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5624 fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5625 rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5626 is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5627 up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used. |
13 | 5628 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10. |
11160 | 5629 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
5630 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
13 | 5631 |
523 | 5632 *'omnifunc'* *'ofu'* |
5633 'omnifunc' 'ofu' string (default: empty) | |
502 | 5634 local to buffer |
5635 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5636 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5637 or |+insert_expand| features} |
623 | 5638 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni |
5639 completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O| | |
648 | 5640 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
5641 invoked and what it should return. | |
1004 | 5642 This option is usually set by a filetype plugin: |
859 | 5643 |:filetype-plugin-on| |
3682 | 5644 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
5645 security reasons. | |
502 | 5646 |
5647 | |
1152 | 5648 *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'* |
1004 | 5649 'opendevice' 'odev' boolean (default off) |
5650 global | |
5651 {not in Vi} | |
5652 {only for MS-DOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
5653 Enable reading and writing from devices. This may get Vim stuck on a | |
5654 device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O. Therefore | |
5655 it is off by default. | |
5656 Note that on MS-Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also | |
5657 result in editing a device. | |
5658 | |
5659 | |
593 | 5660 *'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'* |
5661 'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string (default: empty) | |
5662 global | |
5663 {not in Vi} | |
5664 This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator. | |
5665 See |:map-operator| for more info and an example. | |
5666 | |
5667 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5668 security reasons. | |
5669 | |
5670 | |
2908 | 5671 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* |
5672 'osfiletype' 'oft' string (default: "") | |
7 | 5673 local to buffer |
5674 {not in Vi} | |
2908 | 5675 This option was supported on RISC OS, which has been removed. |
5676 | |
7 | 5677 |
8182
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5678 *'packpath'* *'pp'* |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5679 'packpath' 'pp' string (default: see 'runtimepath') |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5680 {not in Vi} |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5681 Directories used to find packages. See |packages|. |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5682 |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5683 |
7 | 5684 *'paragraphs'* *'para'* |
1564 | 5685 'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp") |
7 | 5686 global |
5687 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs | |
5688 of two letters (see |object-motions|). | |
5689 | |
5690 *'paste'* *'nopaste'* | |
5691 'paste' boolean (default off) | |
5692 global | |
5693 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 5694 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy |
5695 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid | |
7 | 5696 unexpected effects. |
5697 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim | |
10 | 5698 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim |
7 | 5699 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste' |
5700 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the | |
5701 mouse clicks itself. | |
148 | 5702 This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in |
5703 your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting | |
5704 'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button | |
5705 will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping. | |
7 | 5706 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on): |
5707 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled | |
5708 - abbreviations are disabled | |
5709 - 'autoindent' is reset | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5710 - 'expandtab' is reset |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5711 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty |
7 | 5712 - 'revins' is reset |
5713 - 'ruler' is reset | |
5714 - 'showmatch' is reset | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5715 - 'smartindent' is reset |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5716 - 'smarttab' is reset |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5717 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0 |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5718 - 'textwidth' is set to 0 |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5719 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0 |
7 | 5720 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled: |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5721 - 'cindent' |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5722 - 'indentexpr' |
7 | 5723 - 'lisp' |
5724 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is | |
5725 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the | |
5726 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to | |
5727 set the 'paste' option again. | |
5728 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to | |
5729 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on. | |
5730 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect. | |
5731 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use | |
5732 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key. | |
5733 | |
5734 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'* | |
5735 'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "") | |
5736 global | |
5737 {not in Vi} | |
5738 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste' | |
5739 option. This is like specifying a mapping: > | |
5740 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR> | |
5741 < Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'. | |
5742 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set. | |
5743 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in | |
5744 Command-line mode. | |
5745 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However, | |
5746 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do | |
5747 this: > | |
5748 :map <F10> :set paste<CR> | |
5749 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR> | |
5750 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR> | |
5751 :imap <F11> <nop> | |
5752 :set pastetoggle=<F11> | |
5753 < This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode. | |
5754 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste | |
5755 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key | |
5756 sequence. | |
1621 | 5757 When the value has several bytes 'ttimeoutlen' applies. |
7 | 5758 |
5759 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'* | |
5760 'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "") | |
5761 global | |
5762 {not in Vi} | |
5763 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
5764 feature} | |
5765 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate | |
10 | 5766 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|. |
7 | 5767 |
6091
7090d7f160f7
Update runtime files. Add vroom file support.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
6032
diff
changeset
|
5768 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E205* *E206* |
7 | 5769 'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "") |
5770 global | |
5771 {not in Vi} | |
5772 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used | |
5773 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a | |
5774 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a | |
5775 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the | |
5776 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option | |
5777 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like | |
13100
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5778 ".orig" or ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5779 (Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5780 new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5781 to write a backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5782 empty file is created. |
7 | 5783 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made. |
5784 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the | |
5785 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always | |
5786 recognized as a compressed file. | |
36 | 5787 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 5788 |
3224 | 5789 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* *E854* |
7 | 5790 'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,," |
5791 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,," | |
5792 other systems: ".,,") | |
5793 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
5794 {not in Vi} | |
5795 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1668 | 5796 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands, |
5797 provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not | |
5798 starting with "/", "./" or "../"). The directories in the 'path' | |
5799 option may be relative or absolute. | |
7 | 5800 - Use commas to separate directory names: > |
5801 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include | |
5802 < - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards | |
5803 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory | |
5804 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: > | |
5805 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space | |
5806 < - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra | |
5807 backslash: > | |
5808 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma | |
5809 < - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: > | |
5810 :set path=. | |
5811 < - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two | |
5812 commas: > | |
5813 :set path=,, | |
5814 < - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'. | |
5815 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5816 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding | |
5817 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work. | |
1668 | 5818 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and |
5819 ";". See |file-searching| for info and syntax. | |
7 | 5820 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature} |
5821 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: > | |
5822 :set path=.,c:\\include | |
5823 < Or just use '/' instead: > | |
5824 :set path=.,c:/include | |
5825 < Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as | |
5826 the file! | |
10 | 5827 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly |
7 | 5828 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. |
5829 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of | |
5830 'path', see |:checkpath|. | |
5831 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
5832 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
5833 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: > | |
5834 :set path-= | |
5835 < To add the current directory use: > | |
5836 :set path+= | |
5837 < To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the | |
5838 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory | |
5839 names are separated with a semi-colon: > | |
5840 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g') | |
5841 < Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that | |
5842 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space. | |
5843 | |
12499 | 5844 *'perldll'* |
5845 'perldll' string (default depends on the build) | |
5846 global | |
5847 {not in Vi} | |
5848 {only available when compiled with the |+perl/dyn| | |
5849 feature} | |
5850 Specifies the name of the Perl shared library. The default is | |
5851 DYNAMIC_PERL_DLL, which was specified at compile time. | |
5852 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5853 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5854 security reasons. | |
5855 | |
7 | 5856 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'* |
5857 'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off) | |
5858 local to buffer | |
5859 {not in Vi} | |
5860 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the | |
5861 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a | |
5862 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is | |
5863 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option | |
5864 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible | |
5865 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required. | |
1621 | 5866 'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains |
5867 a Tab. | |
7 | 5868 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of |
5869 tabs and spaces. You might not like this. | |
11160 | 5870 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 5871 Also see 'copyindent'. |
5872 Use |:retab| to clean up white space. | |
5873 | |
5874 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'* | |
5875 'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12) | |
5876 global | |
5877 {not in Vi} | |
5878 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5879 |+quickfix| features} |
7 | 5880 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated |
5881 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given. | |
5882 | |
5883 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'* | |
5884 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590* | |
5885 'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off) | |
5886 local to window | |
5887 {not in Vi} | |
5888 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5889 |+quickfix| features} |
10 | 5890 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option |
7 | 5891 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands |
5892 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc. | |
5893 | |
5894 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'* | |
5895 'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty) | |
5896 global | |
5897 {not in Vi} | |
5898 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5899 feature} | |
15 | 5900 The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5901 See |pdev-option|. | |
36 | 5902 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
5903 security reasons. | |
15 | 5904 |
5905 *'printencoding'* *'penc'* | |
5906 'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems) | |
7 | 5907 global |
5908 {not in Vi} | |
5909 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5910 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5911 Sets the character encoding used when printing. |
5912 See |penc-option|. | |
7 | 5913 |
5914 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'* | |
5915 'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below) | |
5916 global | |
5917 {not in Vi} | |
5918 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5919 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5920 Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|. |
5921 See |pexpr-option|. | |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
5922 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
5923 security reasons. |
15 | 5924 |
5925 *'printfont'* *'pfn'* | |
7 | 5926 'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier") |
5927 global | |
5928 {not in Vi} | |
5929 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5930 feature} | |
15 | 5931 The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5932 See |pfn-option|. | |
7 | 5933 |
5934 *'printheader'* *'pheader'* | |
5935 'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N") | |
5936 global | |
5937 {not in Vi} | |
5938 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5939 feature} | |
15 | 5940 The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output. |
5941 See |pheader-option|. | |
5942 | |
5943 *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'* | |
5944 'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "") | |
5945 global | |
5946 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 5947 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
5948 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 5949 The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
5950 See |pmbcs-option|. | |
5951 | |
5952 *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'* | |
5953 'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "") | |
5954 global | |
5955 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 5956 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
5957 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 5958 List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
5959 See |pmbfn-option|. | |
7 | 5960 |
5961 *'printoptions'* *'popt'* | |
5962 'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "") | |
5963 global | |
5964 {not in Vi} | |
5965 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature} | |
15 | 5966 List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|. |
5967 See |popt-option|. | |
5968 | |
168 | 5969 *'prompt'* *'noprompt'* |
5970 'prompt' boolean (default on) | |
5971 global | |
5972 When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode. | |
5973 | |
766 | 5974 *'pumheight'* *'ph'* |
5975 'pumheight' 'ph' number (default 0) | |
5976 global | |
5977 {not available when compiled without the | |
5978 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
5979 {not in Vi} | |
853 | 5980 Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu for |
5981 Insert mode completion. When zero as much space as available is used. | |
766 | 5982 |ins-completion-menu|. |
5983 | |
13234
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
5984 *'pumwidth'* *'pw'* |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5985 'pumwidth' 'pw' number (default 15) |
13234
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
5986 global |
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
5987 {not available when compiled without the |
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
5988 |+insert_expand| feature} |
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
5989 {not in Vi} |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
5990 Determines the minimum width to use for the popup menu for Insert mode |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5991 completion. |ins-completion-menu|. |
13234
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
5992 |
7228
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
5993 *'pythondll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
5994 'pythondll' string (default depends on the build) |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5995 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5996 {not in Vi} |
7228
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
5997 {only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn| |
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
5998 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5999 Specifies the name of the Python 2.x shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6000 DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
6001 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7228
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6002 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6003 security reasons. |
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6004 |
13154
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6005 *'pythonhome'* |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6006 'pythonhome' string (default "") |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6007 global |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6008 {not in Vi} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6009 {only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn| |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6010 feature} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6011 Specifies the name of the Python 2.x home directory. When 'pythonhome' |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6012 and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set, PYTHON_HOME, |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6013 which was specified at compile time, will be used for the Python 2.x |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6014 home directory. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6015 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6016 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6017 security reasons. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6018 |
7218
36dc8df8560f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0796c0625fa4b9eb2f47fe8c976b78523924e1fb
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7196
diff
changeset
|
6019 *'pythonthreedll'* |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6020 'pythonthreedll' string (default depends on the build) |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6021 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6022 {not in Vi} |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6023 {only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn| |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6024 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6025 Specifies the name of the Python 3 shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6026 DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
6027 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6028 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6029 security reasons. |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6030 |
13154
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6031 *'pythonthreehome'* |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6032 'pythonthreehome' string (default "") |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6033 global |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6034 {not in Vi} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6035 {only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn| |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6036 feature} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6037 Specifies the name of the Python 3 home directory. When |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6038 'pythonthreehome' and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set, |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6039 PYTHON3_HOME, which was specified at compile time, will be used for |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6040 the Python 3 home directory. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6041 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6042 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6043 security reasons. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6044 |
10722
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6045 *'pyxversion'* *'pyx'* |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6046 'pyxversion' 'pyx' number (default depends on the build) |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6047 global |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6048 {not in Vi} |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6049 {only available when compiled with the |+python| or |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6050 the |+python3| feature} |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6051 Specifies the python version used for pyx* functions and commands |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6052 |python_x|. The default value is as follows: |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6053 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6054 Compiled with Default ~ |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6055 |+python| and |+python3| 0 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6056 only |+python| 2 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6057 only |+python3| 3 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6058 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6059 Available values are 0, 2 and 3. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6060 If 'pyxversion' is 0, it is set to 2 or 3 after the first execution of |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6061 any python2/3 commands or functions. E.g. `:py` sets to 2, and `:py3` |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6062 sets to 3. `:pyx` sets it to 3 if Python 3 is available, otherwise sets |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6063 to 2 if Python 2 is available. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6064 See also: |has-pythonx| |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6065 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6066 If Vim is compiled with only |+python| or |+python3| setting |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6067 'pyxversion' has no effect. The pyx* functions and commands are |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6068 always the same as the compiled version. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6069 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6070 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6071 security reasons. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6072 |
140 | 6073 *'quoteescape'* *'qe'* |
12 | 6074 'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\") |
6075 local to buffer | |
6076 {not in Vi} | |
6077 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for | |
6078 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|. | |
6079 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string, | |
6080 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the | |
6081 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string. | |
6082 | |
7 | 6083 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'* |
6084 'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off) | |
6085 local to buffer | |
6086 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from | |
6087 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started | |
6088 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view". | |
164 | 6089 When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current |
6090 buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'. | |
7 | 6091 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is |
164 | 6092 set for the newly edited buffer. |
10617 | 6093 See 'modifiable' for disallowing changes to the buffer. |
7 | 6094 |
1521 | 6095 *'redrawtime'* *'rdt'* |
6096 'redrawtime' 'rdt' number (default 2000) | |
6097 global | |
6098 {not in Vi} | |
6099 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| | |
6100 feature} | |
6101 The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display. This applies to | |
13818
28ac7914b2b6
Update runtime files and translations
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13742
diff
changeset
|
6102 searching for patterns for 'hlsearch', |:match| highlighting and syntax |
11529
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6103 highlighting. |
1521 | 6104 When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further |
11529
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6105 matches will be highlighted. |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6106 For syntax highlighting the time applies per window. When over the |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6107 limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used. |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6108 This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6109 pattern. |
1521 | 6110 |
4681
2eb30f341e8d
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
6111 *'regexpengine'* *'re'* |
4502
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6112 'regexpengine' 're' number (default 0) |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6113 global |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6114 {not in Vi} |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6115 This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines| |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6116 The possible values are: |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6117 0 automatic selection |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6118 1 old engine |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6119 2 NFA engine |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6120 Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6121 that is not supported the pattern will not match. This is only useful |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6122 for debugging the regexp engine. |
6328 | 6123 Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the |
6124 default engine becomes too costly. E.g., when the NFA engine uses too | |
6125 many states. This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of | |
6126 a complex pattern with long text. | |
4502
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6127 |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6128 *'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'* |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6129 'relativenumber' 'rnu' boolean (default off) |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6130 local to window |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6131 {not in Vi} |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6132 Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of |
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2204
diff
changeset
|
6133 each line. Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6134 precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6135 having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6136 other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6137 When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6138 line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6139 'compatible' isn't set). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6140 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6141 number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6142 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6143 characters are put before the number. |
3445 | 6144 See |hl-LineNr| and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for |
6145 the number. | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
6146 |
4780 | 6147 The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of |
6148 'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two | |
6149 options. | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6150 |
7 | 6151 *'remap'* *'noremap'* |
6152 'remap' boolean (default on) | |
6153 global | |
6154 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for | |
6155 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command. | |
717 | 6156 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep |
6157 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with | |
6158 old Vi scripts. | |
7 | 6159 |
6110 | 6160 *'renderoptions'* *'rop'* |
6161 'renderoptions' 'rop' string (default: empty) | |
6162 global | |
6163 {not in Vi} | |
6164 {only available when compiled with GUI and DIRECTX on | |
6165 MS-Windows} | |
6166 Select a text renderer and set its options. The options depend on the | |
6167 renderer. | |
6168 | |
6169 Syntax: > | |
6170 set rop=type:{renderer}(,{name}:{value})* | |
6171 < | |
6172 Currently, only one optional renderer is available. | |
6173 | |
6174 render behavior ~ | |
6175 directx Vim will draw text using DirectX (DirectWrite). It makes | |
6176 drawn glyphs more beautiful than default GDI. | |
6177 It requires 'encoding' is "utf-8", and only works on | |
6178 MS-Windows Vista or newer version. | |
6179 | |
6180 Options: | |
6181 name meaning type value ~ | |
6182 gamma gamma float 1.0 - 2.2 (maybe) | |
6183 contrast enhancedContrast float (unknown) | |
6184 level clearTypeLevel float (unknown) | |
6185 geom pixelGeometry int 0 - 2 (see below) | |
6186 renmode renderingMode int 0 - 6 (see below) | |
6187 taamode textAntialiasMode int 0 - 3 (see below) | |
13150
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6188 scrlines Scroll Lines int (deprecated) |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6189 |
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6190 See this URL for detail (except for scrlines): |
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6191 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368190.aspx |
6110 | 6192 |
6193 For geom: structure of a device pixel. | |
6194 0 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_FLAT | |
6195 1 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_RGB | |
6196 2 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_BGR | |
6197 | |
6198 See this URL for detail: | |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6199 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368114.aspx |
6110 | 6200 |
6201 For renmode: method of rendering glyphs. | |
6202 0 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_DEFAULT | |
6203 1 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_ALIASED | |
6204 2 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_CLASSIC | |
6205 3 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_NATURAL | |
6206 4 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL | |
6207 5 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL_SYMMETRIC | |
6208 6 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_OUTLINE | |
6209 | |
6210 See this URL for detail: | |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6211 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368118.aspx |
6110 | 6212 |
6213 For taamode: antialiasing mode used for drawing text. | |
6214 0 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_DEFAULT | |
6215 1 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_CLEARTYPE | |
6216 2 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_GRAYSCALE | |
6217 3 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_ALIASED | |
6218 | |
6219 See this URL for detail: | |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6220 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368170.aspx |
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6221 |
13150
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6222 For scrlines: |
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6223 This was used for optimizing scrolling behavior, however this |
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6224 is now deprecated. If specified, it is simply ignored. |
6110 | 6225 |
6226 Example: > | |
6227 set encoding=utf-8 | |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6228 set gfn=Ricty_Diminished:h12 |
6110 | 6229 set rop=type:directx |
6230 < | |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6231 If select a raster font (Courier, Terminal or FixedSys which |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6232 have ".fon" extension in file name) to 'guifont', it will be |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6233 drawn by GDI as a fallback. |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6234 |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6235 NOTE: It is known that some fonts and options combination |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6236 causes trouble on drawing glyphs. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6237 |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6238 - 'renmode:5' and 'renmode:6' will not work with some |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6239 special made fonts (True-Type fonts which includes only |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6240 bitmap glyphs). |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6241 - 'taamode:3' will not work with some vector fonts. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6242 |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6243 NOTE: With this option, you can display colored emoji |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6244 (emoticon) in Windows 8.1 or later. To display colored emoji, |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6245 there are some conditions which you should notice. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6246 |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6247 - If your font includes non-colored emoji already, it will |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6248 be used. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6249 - If your font doesn't have emoji, the system chooses an |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6250 alternative symbol font. On Windows 10, "Segoe UI Emoji" |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6251 will be used. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6252 - When this alternative font didn't have fixed width glyph, |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6253 emoji might be rendered beyond the bounding box of drawing |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6254 cell. |
6110 | 6255 |
6256 Other render types are currently not supported. | |
6257 | |
7 | 6258 *'report'* |
6259 'report' number (default 2) | |
6260 global | |
6261 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of | |
6262 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most | |
6263 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0. | |
6264 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used | |
6265 instead of the number of lines. | |
6266 | |
6267 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'* | |
6268 'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on) | |
6269 global | |
6270 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version} | |
6271 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also | |
6272 happens when executing external commands. | |
6273 | |
6274 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te' | |
6275 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring: | |
6276 set t_ti= t_te= | |
6277 To enable restoring (for an xterm): | |
6278 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8 | |
6279 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it) | |
6280 | |
6281 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'* | |
6282 'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off) | |
6283 global | |
6284 {not in Vi} | |
6285 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
6286 feature} | |
6287 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing | |
6288 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_ | |
6289 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6290 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6291 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6292 reset. |
7 | 6293 |
6294 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'* | |
6295 'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off) | |
6296 local to window | |
6297 {not in Vi} | |
6298 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
6299 feature} | |
6300 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters | |
6301 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left. | |
6302 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that | |
6303 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic. | |
6304 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files | |
6305 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is | |
6306 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left | |
6307 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly | |
6308 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|. | |
6309 | |
2341 | 6310 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* |
7 | 6311 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search") |
6312 local to window | |
6313 {not in Vi} | |
6314 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
6315 feature} | |
6316 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in | |
6317 right-to-left mode for a group of commands: | |
6318 | |
6319 search "/" and "?" commands | |
6320 | |
6321 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi. | |
6322 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect. | |
6323 | |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6324 *'rubydll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
6325 'rubydll' string (default: depends on the build) |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6326 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6327 {not in Vi} |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6328 {only available when compiled with the |+ruby/dyn| |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6329 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6330 Specifies the name of the Ruby shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6331 DYNAMIC_RUBY_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
6332 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6333 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6334 security reasons. |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6335 |
7 | 6336 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
6337 'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 6338 global |
6339 {not in Vi} | |
6340 {not available when compiled without the | |
6341 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
6342 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a | |
10 | 6343 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed |
7 | 6344 text in the file is shown on the far right: |
6345 Top first line is visible | |
6346 Bot last line is visible | |
6347 All first and last line are visible | |
6348 45% relative position in the file | |
6349 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler. | |
10 | 6350 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the |
7 | 6351 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the |
233 | 6352 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty), |
7 | 6353 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat' |
6354 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of | |
6355 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both | |
6356 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown, | |
6357 separated with a dash. | |
6358 For an empty line "0-1" is shown. | |
6359 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1". | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6360 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6361 reset. |
7 | 6362 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where |
6363 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|. | |
6364 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6365 | |
6366 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'* | |
6367 'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty) | |
6368 global | |
6369 {not in Vi} | |
6370 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
6371 feature} | |
6372 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler | |
6373 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option. | |
692 | 6374 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
7 | 6375 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15 |
6376 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end. | |
6377 Example: > | |
6378 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%) | |
6379 < | |
6380 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles* | |
6381 'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default: | |
6382 Unix: "$HOME/.vim, | |
6383 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6384 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6385 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
6386 $HOME/.vim/after" | |
6387 Amiga: "home:vimfiles, | |
6388 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6389 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6390 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
6391 home:vimfiles/after" | |
6392 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles, | |
6393 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6394 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6395 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
6396 $HOME/vimfiles/after" | |
6397 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles, | |
6398 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6399 $VIM:vimfiles:after" | |
6400 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles, | |
6401 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6402 Choices:vimfiles/after" | |
6403 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles, | |
6404 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6405 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6406 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
233 | 6407 sys$login:vimfiles/after") |
7 | 6408 global |
6409 {not in Vi} | |
6410 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime | |
6411 files: | |
6412 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype| | |
6413 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts| | |
164 | 6414 autoload/ automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions| |
7 | 6415 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme| |
6416 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler| | |
6417 doc/ documentation |write-local-help| | |
6418 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin| | |
6419 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression| | |
6420 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap| | |
6421 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans| | |
6422 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim| | |
9116
bc38030aec7d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/26852128a2b713ef49341a0c18daba928444e7eb
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9098
diff
changeset
|
6423 pack/ packages |:packadd| |
7 | 6424 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin| |
6425 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding| | |
650 | 6426 spell/ spell checking files |spell| |
7 | 6427 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile| |
6428 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor| | |
6429 | |
6430 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command. | |
6431 | |
6432 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations: | |
6433 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences. | |
6434 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system | |
6435 administrator. | |
6436 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim. | |
6437 *after-directory* | |
6438 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is | |
6439 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed | |
6440 defaults (rarely needed) | |
6441 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for | |
6442 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults | |
6443 or system-wide settings (rarely needed). | |
6444 | |
10211
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
6445 More entries are added when using |packages|. If it gets very long |
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
6446 then `:set rtp` will be truncated, use `:echo &rtp` to see the full |
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
6447 string. |
9116
bc38030aec7d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/26852128a2b713ef49341a0c18daba928444e7eb
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9098
diff
changeset
|
6448 |
7 | 6449 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal |
6450 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for | |
10 | 6451 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid |
7 | 6452 wildcards. |
6453 See |:runtime|. | |
6454 Example: > | |
6455 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME | |
6456 < This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your | |
6457 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a | |
6458 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime | |
6459 files). | |
6460 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the | |
6461 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME | |
6462 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put | |
6463 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed | |
6464 runtime files. | |
13437 | 6465 When Vim is started with |--clean| the home directory entries are not |
6466 included. | |
7 | 6467 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6468 security reasons. | |
6469 | |
6470 *'scroll'* *'scr'* | |
6471 'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height) | |
6472 local to window | |
6473 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be | |
6474 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size | |
6475 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will | |
10 | 6476 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window |
7 | 6477 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives |
6478 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference | |
6479 when lines wrap} | |
6480 | |
6481 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'* | |
6482 'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off) | |
6483 local to window | |
6484 {not in Vi} | |
6485 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current | |
6486 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have | |
6487 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the | |
6488 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'. | |
6489 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be | |
6490 interpreted. | |
6491 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another | |
6492 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows | |
6493 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not. | |
6494 | |
6495 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'* | |
6496 'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1) | |
6497 global | |
6498 {not in Vi} | |
6499 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the | |
6500 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E, | |
6501 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly. | |
532 | 6502 When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the |
6503 percentage of the window height. Thus -50 scrolls half the window | |
6504 height. | |
7 | 6505 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set. |
6506 | |
6507 *'scrolloff'* *'so'* | |
10218
584c835a2de1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/50ba526fbf3e9e5e0e6b0b3086a4d5df581ebc7e
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10211
diff
changeset
|
6508 'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0, set to 5 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 6509 global |
6510 {not in Vi} | |
6511 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor. | |
6512 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If | |
6513 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be | |
6514 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or | |
6515 when long lines wrap). | |
6516 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'. | |
6517 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
6518 | |
6519 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'* | |
6520 'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump") | |
6521 global | |
6522 {not in Vi} | |
6523 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how | |
236 | 6524 'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind |
6525 Options. | |
7 | 6526 The following words are available: |
6527 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
6528 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
6529 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical | |
6530 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first | |
6531 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving | |
6532 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may | |
6533 reach a position before the start or after the end of | |
6534 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when | |
6535 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll | |
6536 to the desired position when possible. | |
6537 When now making that window the current one, two | |
6538 things can be done with the relative offset: | |
6539 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is | |
6540 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current | |
6541 window. When going back to the other window, the | |
1152 | 6542 new relative offset will be used. |
7 | 6543 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are |
6544 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When | |
6545 going back to the other window, it still uses the | |
6546 same relative offset. | |
6547 Also see |scroll-binding|. | |
819 | 6548 When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding, |
6549 even when "ver" isn't there. | |
7 | 6550 |
6551 *'sections'* *'sect'* | |
6552 'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh") | |
6553 global | |
6554 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of | |
6555 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start | |
6556 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh". | |
6557 | |
6558 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523* | |
6559 'secure' boolean (default off) | |
6560 global | |
6561 {not in Vi} | |
6562 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in | |
6563 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are | |
6564 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into | |
6565 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is | |
6566 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be | |
10 | 6567 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set |
7 | 6568 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then. |
6569 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6570 security reasons. | |
6571 | |
6572 *'selection'* *'sel'* | |
6573 'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive") | |
6574 global | |
6575 {not in Vi} | |
6576 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used | |
6577 in Visual and Select mode. | |
6578 Possible values: | |
6579 value past line inclusive ~ | |
6580 old no yes | |
6581 inclusive yes yes | |
6582 exclusive yes no | |
6583 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one | |
6584 character past the line. | |
6585 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included | |
6586 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the | |
6587 selection. | |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
6588 When "old" is used and 'virtualedit' allows the cursor to move past |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
6589 the end of line the line break still isn't included. |
7 | 6590 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end |
6591 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when | |
6592 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty. | |
6593 | |
6594 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
6595 | |
6596 *'selectmode'* *'slm'* | |
6597 'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "") | |
6598 global | |
6599 {not in Vi} | |
6600 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start | |
6601 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started. | |
6602 Possible values: | |
6603 mouse when using the mouse | |
6604 key when using shifted special keys | |
6605 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V | |
6606 See |Select-mode|. | |
6607 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
6608 | |
6609 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'* | |
6610 'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds, | |
13437 | 6611 help,options,tabpages,winsize,terminal") |
7 | 6612 global |
6613 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6614 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 6615 feature} |
6616 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma | |
6617 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring | |
6618 something: | |
6619 word save and restore ~ | |
6620 blank empty windows | |
6621 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows | |
6622 curdir the current directory | |
6623 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
6624 fold options | |
6625 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter | |
75 | 6626 and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only |
6627 String and Number types are stored. | |
7 | 6628 help the help window |
6629 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
6630 global values for local options) | |
6631 options all options and mappings (also global values for local | |
6632 options) | |
6633 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns' | |
6634 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located | |
6635 will become the current directory (useful with | |
6636 projects accessed over a network from different | |
6637 systems) | |
6638 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward | |
6639 slashes | |
827 | 6640 tabpages all tab pages; without this only the current tab page |
6641 is restored, so that you can make a session for each | |
6642 tab page separately | |
13437 | 6643 terminal include terminal windows where the command can be restored |
7 | 6644 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when |
6645 on Windows or DOS | |
6646 winpos position of the whole Vim window | |
6647 winsize window sizes | |
6648 | |
6649 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6650 When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6651 with absolute paths. |
7 | 6652 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files |
6653 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
6654 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
6655 | |
6656 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91* | |
6657 'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh", | |
6658 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or | |
6659 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd") | |
6660 global | |
6661 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the | |
6662 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash' | |
6663 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'. | |
10 | 6664 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f". |
7 | 6665 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
6666 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6667 |
7 | 6668 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6669 it in quotes or escape the space. Example with quotes: > |
7 | 6670 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f |
6671 < Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and | |
10 | 6672 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the |
7 | 6673 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6674 name. Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path |
7 | 6675 separators. |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6676 Example with escaped space (Vim will do this when initializing the |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6677 option from $SHELL): > |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6678 :set shell=/bin/with\\\ space/sh |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6679 < The resulting value of 'shell' is "/bin/with\ space/sh", two |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6680 backslashes are consumed by `:set`. |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6681 |
7 | 6682 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be |
6683 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com" | |
6684 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g., | |
6685 filtering). | |
6686 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is | |
6687 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: > | |
6688 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos | |
6689 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6690 security reasons. | |
6691 | |
6692 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'* | |
3356 | 6693 'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c"; |
3371 | 6694 MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' does not |
6695 contain "sh" somewhere: "/c") | |
7 | 6696 global |
6697 {not in Vi} | |
6698 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g., | |
6699 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like | |
6700 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to | |
11262 | 6701 reduce the need to set this option by the user. |
3082 | 6702 On Unix it can have more than one flag. Each white space separated |
6703 part is passed as an argument to the shell command. | |
6704 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
6705 Also see |dos-shell| for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
7 | 6706 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6707 security reasons. | |
6708 | |
6709 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'* | |
6710 'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee") | |
6711 global | |
6712 {not in Vi} | |
6713 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
6714 feature} | |
6715 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the | |
10 | 6716 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about |
7 | 6717 including spaces and backslashes. |
6718 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
6719 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
6720 of this option). | |
6721 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly | |
6722 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen. | |
6723 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved | |
6724 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or | |
6725 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the | |
2788 | 6726 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh" or "bash" the |
6727 default becomes "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included. | |
6728 Before using the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses | |
6729 "sh". | |
7 | 6730 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" |
6731 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
6732 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was | |
6733 explicitly set before. | |
6734 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the | |
6735 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg' | |
6736 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do | |
6737 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space. | |
6738 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ". | |
6739 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
6740 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
6741 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6742 security reasons. | |
6743 | |
6744 *'shellquote'* *'shq'* | |
6745 'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' | |
6746 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"") | |
6747 global | |
6748 {not in Vi} | |
6749 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
6750 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the | |
6751 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's | |
6752 probably not useful to set both options. | |
6753 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for | |
6754 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell | |
6755 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according | |
6756 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the | |
6757 user. See |dos-shell|. | |
6758 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6759 security reasons. | |
6760 | |
6761 *'shellredir'* *'srr'* | |
6762 'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1") | |
6763 global | |
6764 {not in Vi} | |
6765 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary | |
6766 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces | |
6767 and backslashes. | |
6768 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
6769 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
6770 of this option). | |
6771 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh" | |
6772 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the | |
6773 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes | |
6774 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included. | |
6775 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked | |
6776 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with | |
6777 ".exe" appended are checked for. | |
6778 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" | |
6779 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
6780 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was | |
6781 explicitly set before. | |
6782 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
6783 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
6784 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6785 security reasons. | |
6786 | |
6787 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'* | |
6788 'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off) | |
6789 global | |
6790 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
6791 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is | |
6792 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or | |
6793 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to | |
6794 forward slashes by Vim. | |
6795 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some | |
6796 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening | |
6797 any file for best results. This might change in the future. | |
6798 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path | |
6799 separator. To test if this is so use: > | |
6800 if exists('+shellslash') | |
6801 < | |
168 | 6802 *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'* |
6803 'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on) | |
6804 global | |
6805 {not in Vi} | |
6806 When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe. | |
6807 When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway. | |
2965 | 6808 Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix and MS-Windows 2K and |
6809 later. You can check it with: > | |
168 | 6810 :if has("filterpipe") |
6811 < The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file | |
6812 and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection. | |
6813 The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding | |
6814 can be detected. | |
6815 The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|, | |
6816 |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when | |
6817 'shelltemp' is off. | |
9533
9f921133ee90
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/269f595f9eef584937e7eae70fde68cdd7da5bcf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9464
diff
changeset
|
6818 The `system()` function does not respect this option and always uses |
9f921133ee90
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/269f595f9eef584937e7eae70fde68cdd7da5bcf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9464
diff
changeset
|
6819 temp files. |
11160 | 6820 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
6821 is reset. | |
168 | 6822 |
7 | 6823 *'shelltype'* *'st'* |
6824 'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0) | |
6825 global | |
6826 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga} | |
6827 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work | |
6828 which use a shell. | |
6829 0 and 1: always use the shell | |
6830 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines | |
6831 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command | |
6832 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly. | |
6833 | |
6834 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands | |
6835 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands | |
6836 | |
3371 | 6837 *'shellxescape'* *'sxe'* |
6838 'shellxescape' 'sxe' string (default: ""; | |
6839 for MS-DOS and MS-Windows: "\"&|<>()@^") | |
6840 global | |
6841 {not in Vi} | |
6842 When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this | |
6843 option will be escaped with a '^' character. This makes it possible | |
6844 to execute most external commands with cmd.exe. | |
6845 | |
7 | 6846 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'* |
6847 'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: ""; | |
3359 | 6848 for Win32, when 'shell' is cmd.exe: "(" |
6849 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh" | |
6850 somewhere: "\"" | |
7 | 6851 for Unix, when using system(): "\"") |
6852 global | |
6853 {not in Vi} | |
6854 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
6855 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See | |
6856 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful | |
6857 to set both options. | |
3359 | 6858 When the value is '(' then ')' is appended. When the value is '"(' |
6859 then ')"' is appended. | |
6860 When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'. | |
3352 | 6861 This is an empty string by default on most systems, but is known to be |
6862 useful for on Win32 version, either for cmd.exe which automatically | |
6863 strips off the first and last quote on a command, or 3rd-party shells | |
6864 such as the MKS Korn Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The | |
6865 default is adjusted according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need | |
6866 to set this option by the user. See |dos-shell|. | |
7 | 6867 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6868 security reasons. | |
6869 | |
6870 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'* | |
6871 'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off) | |
6872 global | |
6873 {not in Vi} | |
6874 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and < | |
6875 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to | |
6876 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible). | |
6877 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6878 | |
6879 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'* | |
6880 'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8) | |
6881 local to buffer | |
10 | 6882 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for |
7 | 6883 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc. |
3893 | 6884 When zero the 'ts' value will be used. Use the |shiftwidth()| |
6885 function to get the effective shiftwidth value. | |
7 | 6886 |
6887 *'shortmess'* *'shm'* | |
168 | 6888 'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "", |
6889 POSIX default: "A") | |
7 | 6890 global |
6891 {not in Vi} | |
6892 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file | |
6893 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages. | |
6894 It is a list of flags: | |
6895 flag meaning when present ~ | |
6896 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)" | |
6897 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]" | |
6898 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters" | |
6899 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]" | |
6900 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]" | |
6901 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]" | |
6902 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message | |
6903 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command | |
6904 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of | |
6905 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]". | |
6906 a all of the above abbreviations | |
6907 | |
6908 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message | |
6909 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on) | |
6910 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message. | |
6911 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn"). | |
6912 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search | |
6913 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages | |
6914 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit | |
6915 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column. | |
6916 Ignored in Ex mode. | |
6917 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to | |
233 | 6918 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle. |
7 | 6919 Ignored in Ex mode. |
6920 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file | |
6921 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file | |
6922 is found. | |
6923 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|. | |
5946 | 6924 c don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages. For example, |
6925 "-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match", | |
6926 "Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc. | |
8560
f3c636c673f7
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/426dd0219512af5f4abeb0901b533159253ffba3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8497
diff
changeset
|
6927 q use "recording" instead of "recording @a" |
f3c636c673f7
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/426dd0219512af5f4abeb0901b533159253ffba3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8497
diff
changeset
|
6928 F don't give the file info when editing a file, like `:silent` |
f3c636c673f7
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/426dd0219512af5f4abeb0901b533159253ffba3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8497
diff
changeset
|
6929 was used for the command |
7 | 6930 |
6931 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers | |
6932 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as | |
6933 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you | |
6934 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!" | |
6935 Useful values: | |
6936 shm= No abbreviation of message. | |
6937 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information. | |
6938 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary. | |
6939 | |
6940 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
6941 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6942 | |
6943 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'* | |
6944 'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off) | |
6945 local to buffer | |
6946 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions} | |
6947 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3 | |
6948 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this | |
6949 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when | |
6950 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available | |
6951 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful | |
6952 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos | |
6953 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this | |
6954 option is always on by default. | |
6955 | |
6956 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595* | |
6957 'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "") | |
6958 global | |
6959 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6960 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 6961 feature} |
6962 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6963 values are "> " or "+++ ": > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6964 :set showbreak=>\ |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6965 < Note the backslash to escape the trailing space. It's easier like |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6966 this: > |
2314
233eb4412f5d
Added 'colorcolumn' option. Partly by Gregor Uhlenheuer.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2302
diff
changeset
|
6967 :let &showbreak = '+++ ' |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6968 < Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and |
7 | 6969 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the |
6970 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line). | |
6971 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in | |
6972 'highlight'. | |
6973 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently. | |
6974 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the | |
6975 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'. | |
6976 | |
6977 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
6978 'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
6979 Vi default: off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 6980 global |
6981 {not in Vi} | |
6982 {not available when compiled without the | |
6983 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
1152 | 6984 Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen. Set this |
6985 option off if your terminal is slow. | |
7 | 6986 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown: |
6987 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters. | |
2324
0a258a67051d
In Visual mode with 'showcmd' display the number of bytes and characters.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2317
diff
changeset
|
6988 If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6" |
0a258a67051d
In Visual mode with 'showcmd' display the number of bytes and characters.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2317
diff
changeset
|
6989 means two characters and six bytes. |
7 | 6990 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines. |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6991 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6992 {lines}x{columns}. |
7 | 6993 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
6994 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6995 | |
6996 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'* | |
6997 'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off) | |
6998 global | |
6999 {not in Vi} | |
7000 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the | |
7001 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search | |
10 | 7002 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have |
7 | 7003 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are |
7004 required (coding style permitting). | |
1621 | 7005 Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in |
7006 'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not | |
7007 match the typed text. | |
7 | 7008 |
7009 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'* | |
7010 'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off) | |
7011 global | |
7012 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The | |
7013 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to | |
7014 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'. | |
7015 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7016 seen or not). |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7017 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7018 reset. |
7 | 7019 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character |
7020 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs. | |
7021 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and | |
7022 blinking when showing the match. | |
7023 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show | |
7024 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite | |
7025 matches. | |
699 | 7026 Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving |
7027 around |pi_paren.txt|. | |
7028 Note: Use of the short form is rated PG. | |
7 | 7029 |
7030 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'* | |
7031 'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
7032 global | |
7033 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line. | |
7034 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for | |
7035 this message. | |
10 | 7036 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this |
7 | 7037 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is |
7038 not set. | |
7039 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
7040 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7041 | |
677 | 7042 *'showtabline'* *'stal'* |
7043 'showtabline' 'stal' number (default 1) | |
7044 global | |
7045 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7046 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
677 | 7047 feature} |
7048 The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels | |
7049 will be displayed: | |
7050 0: never | |
7051 1: only if there are at least two tab pages | |
7052 2: always | |
7053 This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages | |
7054 line. | |
7055 See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages. | |
7056 | |
7 | 7057 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'* |
7058 'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0) | |
7059 global | |
7060 {not in Vi} | |
7061 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when | |
7062 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen. | |
7063 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen. | |
7064 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using | |
7065 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl" | |
7066 commands. | |
7067 | |
7068 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'* | |
7069 'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0) | |
7070 global | |
7071 {not in Vi} | |
7072 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the | |
534 | 7073 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a |
7074 value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero | |
7075 value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in | |
7076 horizontally (except at beginning of the line). Setting this option | |
7077 to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor | |
7078 horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too | |
7079 close to the beginning of the line. | |
7 | 7080 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
7081 | |
7082 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as | |
7083 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move | |
9852
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7084 onto the "extends" character: > |
7 | 7085 |
7086 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:< | |
7087 :set sidescrolloff=1 | |
9852
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7088 < |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7089 *'signcolumn'* *'scl'* |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7090 'signcolumn' 'scl' string (default "auto") |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7091 local to window |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7092 {not in Vi} |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7093 {not available when compiled without the |+signs| |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7094 feature} |
9860
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7095 Whether or not to draw the signcolumn. Valid values are: |
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7096 "auto" only when there is a sign to display |
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7097 "no" never |
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7098 "yes" always |
7 | 7099 |
7100 | |
7101 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'* | |
7102 'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off) | |
7103 global | |
7104 {not in Vi} | |
7105 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper | |
7106 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and | |
7107 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N", | |
3557 | 7108 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc. After |
7 | 7109 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, |
7110 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>. | |
7111 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
7112 | |
7113 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'* | |
7114 'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off) | |
7115 local to buffer | |
7116 {not in Vi} | |
7117 {not available when compiled without the | |
7118 |+smartindent| feature} | |
7119 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like | |
7120 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does | |
7121 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict, | |
2662 | 7122 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set, |
2642 | 7123 setting 'si' has no effect. 'indentexpr' is a more advanced |
7124 alternative. | |
7 | 7125 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'. |
7126 An indent is automatically inserted: | |
7127 - After a line ending in '{'. | |
7128 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'. | |
7129 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command). | |
7130 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is | |
7131 given the same indent as the matching '{'. | |
7132 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for | |
7133 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent | |
10 | 7134 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this |
7 | 7135 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H. |
7136 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted | |
7137 right. | |
11160 | 7138 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7139 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7140 reset. |
7 | 7141 |
7142 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'* | |
7143 'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off) | |
7144 global | |
7145 {not in Vi} | |
7146 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to | |
648 | 7147 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places. A |
7148 <BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the | |
7149 line. | |
650 | 7150 When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or |
648 | 7151 'softtabstop'. 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or |
7152 right |shift-left-right|. | |
1263 | 7153 What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab' |
7 | 7154 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the |
11 | 7155 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7156 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7157 reset. |
7 | 7158 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7159 | |
7160 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'* | |
7161 'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0) | |
7162 local to buffer | |
7163 {not in Vi} | |
7164 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing | |
7165 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like | |
7166 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is | |
7167 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value | |
7168 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However, | |
7169 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters. | |
7170 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off. | |
3893 | 7171 When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used. |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7172 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7173 when 'paste' is reset. |
7 | 7174 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of |
7175 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. | |
7176 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is | |
7177 set. | |
7178 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
7179 | |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7180 If Vim is compiled with the |+vartabs| feature then the value of |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7181 'softtabstop' will be ignored if |'varsofttabstop'| is set to |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7182 anything other than an empty string. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7183 |
221 | 7184 *'spell'* *'nospell'* |
7185 'spell' boolean (default off) | |
7186 local to window | |
7187 {not in Vi} | |
7188 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7189 feature} | |
7190 When on spell checking will be done. See |spell|. | |
236 | 7191 The languages are specified with 'spelllang'. |
221 | 7192 |
386 | 7193 *'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'* |
389 | 7194 'spellcapcheck' 'spc' string (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+") |
386 | 7195 local to buffer |
7196 {not in Vi} | |
7197 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7198 feature} | |
7199 Pattern to locate the end of a sentence. The following word will be | |
7200 checked to start with a capital letter. If not then it is highlighted | |
484 | 7201 with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled). |
386 | 7202 When this check is not wanted make this option empty. |
7203 Only used when 'spell' is set. | |
389 | 7204 Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about |
7205 including spaces and backslashes. | |
480 | 7206 To set this option automatically depending on the language, see |
7207 |set-spc-auto|. | |
386 | 7208 |
314 | 7209 *'spellfile'* *'spf'* |
7210 'spellfile' 'spf' string (default empty) | |
7211 local to buffer | |
7212 {not in Vi} | |
7213 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7214 feature} | |
7215 Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw| | |
401 | 7216 commands. It must end in ".{encoding}.add". You need to include the |
7217 path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory. | |
386 | 7218 *E765* |
7219 It may also be a comma separated list of names. A count before the | |
7220 |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each. This allows using | |
7221 a personal word list file and a project word list file. | |
314 | 7222 When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for |
819 | 7223 you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable. If |
7224 there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created. For the file | |
7225 name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, | |
353 | 7226 ignoring the region. |
7227 The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not | |
7228 have to appear in 'spelllang'. | |
7229 Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region | |
7230 name if you want to. However, it will then only be used when | |
7231 'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files | |
7232 without region name will be found. | |
336 | 7233 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
7234 security reasons. | |
314 | 7235 |
221 | 7236 *'spelllang'* *'spl'* |
314 | 7237 'spelllang' 'spl' string (default "en") |
221 | 7238 local to buffer |
7239 {not in Vi} | |
7240 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7241 feature} | |
353 | 7242 A comma separated list of word list names. When the 'spell' option is |
7243 on spellchecking will be done for these languages. Example: > | |
7244 set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical | |
7245 < This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized. Words | |
7246 that are not recognized will be highlighted. | |
7247 The word list name must not include a comma or dot. Using a dash is | |
7248 recommended to separate the two letter language name from a | |
7249 specification. Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words. | |
7250 A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is | |
7251 the two-letter, lower case region name. You can use more than one | |
7252 region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian | |
7253 English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great | |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
7254 Britain. (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than |
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
7255 en_ca, en_gb and en_us). |
5477 | 7256 If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from |
7257 spell checking. This is useful when editing text that also has Asian | |
7258 words. | |
484 | 7259 *E757* |
419 | 7260 As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is. The |
7261 first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name | |
7262 (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter). | |
7263 This is mainly for testing purposes. You must make sure the correct | |
7264 encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it. | |
236 | 7265 When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good |
419 | 7266 idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the |
7267 files twice. | |
353 | 7268 How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|. |
221 | 7269 |
653 | 7270 If the |spellfile.vim| plugin is active and you use a language name |
7271 for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin | |
7272 will ask you if you want to download the file. | |
7273 | |
480 | 7274 After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files |
7275 "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'. "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang' | |
650 | 7276 up to the first comma, dot or underscore. |
7277 Also see |set-spc-auto|. | |
480 | 7278 |
7279 | |
344 | 7280 *'spellsuggest'* *'sps'* |
7281 'spellsuggest' 'sps' string (default "best") | |
7282 global | |
7283 {not in Vi} | |
7284 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7285 feature} | |
593 | 7286 Methods used for spelling suggestions. Both for the |z=| command and |
374 | 7287 the |spellsuggest()| function. This is a comma-separated list of |
7288 items: | |
7289 | |
7290 best Internal method that works best for English. Finds | |
7291 changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like | |
7292 scoring to improve the ordering. | |
7293 | |
7294 double Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the | |
7295 results. The first method is "fast", the other method | |
344 | 7296 computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad |
374 | 7297 word. That only works when the language specifies |
7298 sound folding. Can be slow and doesn't always give | |
7299 better results. | |
7300 | |
7301 fast Internal method that only checks for simple changes: | |
7302 character inserts/deletes/swaps. Works well for | |
7303 simple typing mistakes. | |
7304 | |
593 | 7305 {number} The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|. |
484 | 7306 Not used for |spellsuggest()|. The number of |
7307 suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines' | |
7308 minus two. | |
7309 | |
374 | 7310 file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns, |
7311 separated by a slash. The first column contains the | |
7312 bad word, the second column the suggested good word. | |
7313 Example: | |
7314 theribal/terrible ~ | |
7315 Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the | |
7316 top of the suggestion list with the internal methods. | |
7317 Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for | |
7318 comments. | |
5862 | 7319 The word in the second column must be correct, |
7320 otherwise it will not be used. Add the word to an | |
7321 ".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling | |
7322 mistake. | |
374 | 7323 The file is used for all languages. |
7324 | |
7325 expr:{expr} Evaluate expression {expr}. Use a function to avoid | |
7326 trouble with spaces. |v:val| holds the badly spelled | |
7327 word. The expression must evaluate to a List of | |
7328 Lists, each with a suggestion and a score. | |
7329 Example: | |
11062 | 7330 [['the', 33], ['that', 44]] ~ |
593 | 7331 Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the |
374 | 7332 internal methods use. A lower score is better. |
7333 This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily | |
7334 set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part. | |
7335 Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the | |
7336 'verbose' option to a non-zero value. | |
7337 | |
7338 Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used. The others may | |
7339 appear several times in any order. Example: > | |
7340 :set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest() | |
7341 < | |
7342 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
7343 security reasons. | |
344 | 7344 |
7345 | |
7 | 7346 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'* |
7347 'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off) | |
7348 global | |
7349 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7350 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 7351 feature} |
7352 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current | |
7353 one. |:split| | |
7354 | |
7355 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'* | |
7356 'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off) | |
7357 global | |
7358 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7359 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 7360 feature} |
7361 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the | |
7362 current one. |:vsplit| | |
7363 | |
7364 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'* | |
7365 'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on) | |
7366 global | |
7367 {not in Vi} | |
7368 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first | |
11 | 7369 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column |
10 | 7370 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, |
11 | 7371 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>" |
7 | 7372 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing |
7373 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that | |
7374 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+". | |
7375 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column | |
7376 where it was the last time the buffer was edited. | |
7377 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
7378 | |
2709 | 7379 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E542* |
7 | 7380 'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty) |
40 | 7381 global or local to window |global-local| |
7 | 7382 {not in Vi} |
7383 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
7384 feature} | |
7385 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line. | |
7386 Also see |status-line|. | |
7387 | |
7388 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with | |
7389 normal text. Each status line item is of the form: | |
7390 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item} | |
7876
93f747af7b58
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5e9b2fa9bb0e6061cf18457c173cd141a5dc9c92
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7687
diff
changeset
|
7391 All fields except the {item} are optional. A single percent sign can |
2709 | 7392 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified. *E541* |
7 | 7393 |
680 | 7394 When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression, |
7395 evaluated and the result is used as the option value. Example: > | |
7396 :set statusline=%!MyStatusLine() | |
7397 < The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too. | |
3445 | 7398 Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the |
7399 current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the | |
7400 context of the window that the statusline belongs to. | |
680 | 7401 |
7402 When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made | |
7403 empty to avoid further errors. Otherwise screen updating would loop. | |
7404 | |
7 | 7405 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and |
7406 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|. | |
7407 | |
7408 field meaning ~ | |
233 | 7409 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified |
7 | 7410 when minwid is larger than the length of the item. |
233 | 7411 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'. |
7 | 7412 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'. |
7413 Value must be 50 or less. | |
10 | 7414 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<' |
7 | 7415 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be |
7416 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number | |
7417 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like | |
7418 an exponential notation. | |
7419 item A one letter code as described below. | |
7420 | |
7421 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The | |
7422 second character in "item" is the type: | |
7423 N for number | |
7424 S for string | |
7425 F for flags as described below | |
7426 - not applicable | |
7427 | |
7428 item meaning ~ | |
1152 | 7429 f S Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current |
7430 directory. | |
7 | 7431 F S Full path to the file in the buffer. |
7432 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer. | |
1698 | 7433 m F Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off. |
7 | 7434 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-". |
1698 | 7435 r F Readonly flag, text is "[RO]". |
7 | 7436 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO". |
1698 | 7437 h F Help buffer flag, text is "[help]". |
7 | 7438 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP". |
1698 | 7439 w F Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]". |
7 | 7440 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV". |
1698 | 7441 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]". See 'filetype'. |
7 | 7442 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'. |
2411
68e394361ca3
Add "q" item for 'statusline'. Add w:quickfix_title. (Lech Lorens)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2400
diff
changeset
|
7443 q S "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty. |
7 | 7444 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are |
7445 being used: "<keymap>" | |
7446 n N Buffer number. | |
2709 | 7447 b N Value of character under cursor. |
7 | 7448 B N As above, in hexadecimal. |
7449 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1. | |
7450 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added) | |
7451 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature} | |
7452 O N As above, in hexadecimal. | |
233 | 7453 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.) |
7 | 7454 l N Line number. |
7455 L N Number of lines in buffer. | |
7456 c N Column number. | |
7457 v N Virtual column number. | |
10 | 7458 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'. |
7 | 7459 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|. |
7460 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the | |
5055 | 7461 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length, unless |
7462 translated. | |
233 | 7463 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max}) |
7 | 7464 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one. |
680 | 7465 { NF Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result. |
13742
a34b1323286c
patch 8.0.1743: terminal window options are named inconsistently
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13735
diff
changeset
|
7466 Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'. The |
a34b1323286c
patch 8.0.1743: terminal window options are named inconsistently
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13735
diff
changeset
|
7467 expression cannot contain a '}' character, call a function to |
a34b1323286c
patch 8.0.1743: terminal window options are named inconsistently
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13735
diff
changeset
|
7468 work around that. |
7 | 7469 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and |
7470 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere. | |
7471 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed. | |
681 | 7472 T N For 'tabline': start of tab page N label. Use %T after the last |
7473 label. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
7474 X N For 'tabline': start of close tab N label. Use %X after the | |
7475 label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X. Use %999X for a "close current tab" | |
7476 mark. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
7 | 7477 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start. |
7478 No width fields allowed. | |
7479 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items. | |
7480 No width fields allowed. | |
680 | 7481 # - Set highlight group. The name must follow and then a # again. |
7482 Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname. The same | |
7483 highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current | |
7484 windows. | |
7 | 7485 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the |
233 | 7486 minwid field, e.g. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*. |
7 | 7487 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied |
7488 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows. | |
7489 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9| | |
7490 | |
1698 | 7491 When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when |
7492 that flag comes right after plaintext. This will make a nice display | |
7493 when flags are used like in the examples below. | |
7 | 7494 |
233 | 7495 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are |
7 | 7496 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will |
7497 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear | |
7498 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. > | |
7499 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)... | |
7245
8896150aba23
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e392eb41f8dfc01bd13634e534ac6b4d505326f4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7233
diff
changeset
|
7500 < *g:actual_curbuf* |
7 | 7501 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status |
7502 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set | |
7503 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is | |
233 | 7504 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context. |
7 | 7505 The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the |
634 | 7506 real current buffer. |
7507 | |
3682 | 7508 The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from |
7509 a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 7510 |
7511 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
7512 evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|. | |
7 | 7513 |
7514 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting | |
7515 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by | |
7516 setting an option without changing its value. Example: > | |
7517 :let &ro = &ro | |
7518 | |
7519 < A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes. | |
7520 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules | |
7521 described above. | |
7522 | |
199 | 7523 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable! |
7 | 7524 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
7525 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right. |
7 | 7526 |
7527 Examples: | |
7528 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set > | |
7529 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P | |
7530 < Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") > | |
7531 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P | |
7532 < Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. > | |
7533 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b' | |
7534 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red | |
7535 < Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded > | |
7536 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h... | |
7537 < In the |:autocmd|'s: > | |
7538 :let b:gzflag = 1 | |
7539 < And: > | |
7540 :unlet b:gzflag | |
7541 < And define this function: > | |
7542 :function VarExists(var, val) | |
7543 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif | |
7544 :endfunction | |
7545 < | |
7546 *'suffixes'* *'su'* | |
7547 'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj") | |
7548 global | |
7549 {not in Vi} | |
7550 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files | |
7551 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the | |
10 | 7552 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as |
7553 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a | |
7 | 7554 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about |
7555 including spaces and backslashes). | |
7556 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files. | |
7557 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
7558 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
7559 uses another default. | |
7560 | |
7561 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'* | |
7562 'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "") | |
7563 local to buffer | |
7564 {not in Vi} | |
7565 {not available when compiled without the | |
7566 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
7567 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a | |
7568 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: > | |
7569 :set suffixesadd=.java | |
7570 < | |
7571 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'* | |
7572 'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on) | |
7573 local to buffer | |
7574 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 7575 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a |
7 | 7576 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with |
7577 confidential information that even root must not be able to access. | |
7578 Careful: All text will be in memory: | |
7579 - Don't use this for big files. | |
7580 - Recovery will be impossible! | |
7581 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and | |
7582 'swapfile' is set. | |
7583 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is | |
7584 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is | |
7585 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created. | |
7586 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|. | |
5763 | 7587 If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it, |
7588 use the |:noswapfile| modifier. | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
7589 See 'directory' for where the swap file is created. |
7 | 7590 |
7591 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to | |
7592 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
7593 | |
7594 *'swapsync'* *'sws'* | |
7595 'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync") | |
7596 global | |
7597 {not in Vi} | |
7598 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after | |
10 | 7599 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems. |
7 | 7600 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and |
7601 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work. | |
7602 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it, | |
7603 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some | |
7604 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system | |
7605 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default | |
7606 fsync(), which may work better on some systems. | |
36 | 7607 The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file. |
7 | 7608 |
7609 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'* | |
7610 'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "") | |
7611 global | |
7612 {not in Vi} | |
7613 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers. | |
7614 Possible values (comma separated list): | |
7615 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that | |
7616 contains the specified buffer (if there is one). | |
7617 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows. | |
7618 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when | |
7619 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is | |
7620 also used in all buffer related split commands, for | |
7621 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind". | |
825 | 7622 usetab Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab |
856 | 7623 pages. |
7 | 7624 split If included, split the current window before loading |
3153 | 7625 a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors. |
7626 Otherwise: do not split, use current window. | |
6843 | 7627 vsplit Just like "split" but split vertically. |
1621 | 7628 newtab Like "split", but open a new tab page. Overrules |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
7629 "split" when both are present. |
7 | 7630 |
410 | 7631 *'synmaxcol'* *'smc'* |
7632 'synmaxcol' 'smc' number (default 3000) | |
7633 local to buffer | |
7634 {not in Vi} | |
7635 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7636 feature} | |
419 | 7637 Maximum column in which to search for syntax items. In long lines the |
7638 text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not | |
7639 be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared. | |
410 | 7640 This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one |
7641 long line. | |
7642 Set to zero to remove the limit. | |
7643 | |
7 | 7644 *'syntax'* *'syn'* |
7645 'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty) | |
7646 local to buffer | |
7647 {not in Vi} | |
7648 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7649 feature} | |
7650 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless | |
7651 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off". | |
7652 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the | |
7653 b:current_syntax variable does). | |
7654 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is | |
782 | 7655 not automatically recognized. Example, in an IDL file: |
7656 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */ ~ | |
7657 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
7658 names. Example: | |
7659 /* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
7660 This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax. | |
7661 Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition, | |
7662 otherwise it will be skipped. More than one dot may appear. | |
7663 To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: > | |
7 | 7664 :set syntax=OFF |
7665 < To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the | |
7666 'filetype' option: > | |
7667 :set syntax=ON | |
7668 < What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the | |
7669 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument. | |
7670 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or | |
7671 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 7672 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 7673 |
699 | 7674 *'tabline'* *'tal'* |
677 | 7675 'tabline' 'tal' string (default empty) |
674 | 7676 global |
7677 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7678 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
674 | 7679 feature} |
677 | 7680 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages |
7681 line at the top of the Vim window. When empty Vim will use a default | |
681 | 7682 tab pages line. See |setting-tabline| for more info. |
677 | 7683 |
7684 The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline' | |
688 | 7685 option and only when there is no GUI tab line. When 'e' is in |
7686 'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used | |
2572
ee53a39d5896
Last changes for the 7.3 release!
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2570
diff
changeset
|
7687 instead. Note that the two tab pages lines are very different. |
677 | 7688 |
7689 The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'. You can use | |
7690 |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out | |
681 | 7691 the text to be displayed. Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for |
7692 the second one, etc. Use "%X" items for closing labels. | |
677 | 7693 |
7694 Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others | |
7695 are invisible and you can't jump to their windows. | |
7696 | |
674 | 7697 |
699 | 7698 *'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'* |
7699 'tabpagemax' 'tpm' number (default 10) | |
7700 global | |
7701 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7702 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
699 | 7703 feature} |
7704 Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line | |
7705 argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage| | |
7706 | |
7707 | |
7708 *'tabstop'* *'ts'* | |
7 | 7709 'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8) |
7710 local to buffer | |
7711 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see | |
7712 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option. | |
7713 | |
7714 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file | |
7715 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it). | |
7716 | |
7717 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim: | |
7718 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4 | |
7719 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim | |
1263 | 7720 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will |
7 | 7721 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters. |
7722 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use | |
7723 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The | |
7724 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed. | |
7725 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a | |
10 | 7726 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only |
7 | 7727 works when using Vim to edit the file. |
7728 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and | |
7729 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only) | |
7730 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have | |
7731 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this | |
7732 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is | |
7733 changed. | |
7734 | |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7735 If Vim is compiled with the |+vartabs| feature then the value of |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7736 'tabstop' will be ignored if |'vartabstop'| is set to anything other |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7737 than an empty string. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7738 |
7 | 7739 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'* |
7740 'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on) | |
7741 global | |
7742 {not in Vi} | |
7743 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either | |
10 | 7744 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary |
7 | 7745 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search |
7746 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted. | |
7747 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that | |
7748 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the | |
7749 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off. | |
7750 | |
7751 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags | |
10 | 7752 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for |
7 | 7753 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When |
7754 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done. | |
7755 | |
7756 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line | |
7757 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: > | |
1621 | 7758 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some comment/ |
7 | 7759 < [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>] |
7760 | |
7761 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7762 files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used |
7 | 7763 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search. |
7764 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only | |
7765 be found in the retry. | |
7766 | |
22 | 7767 If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second, |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7768 linear search can be avoided when case is ignored. Use a value of '2' |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7769 in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be case-fold |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7770 sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command: |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7771 "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version 5.x or higher |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7772 (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used for this as |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7773 well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work. |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7774 |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7775 By default, tag searches are case-sensitive. Case is ignored when |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7776 'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7777 "ignore". |
9913
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7778 Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or |
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7779 'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase |
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7780 characters. |
7 | 7781 |
7782 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match | |
7783 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags | |
7784 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off. | |
7785 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on | |
7786 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above | |
7787 must be included in the tags file. | |
7788 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g., | |
7789 command-line completion and ":help"). | |
7790 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions} | |
7791 | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7792 *'tagcase'* *'tc'* |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7793 'tagcase' 'tc' string (default "followic") |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7794 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7795 {not in Vi} |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7796 This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7797 file: |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7798 followic Follow the 'ignorecase' option |
9913
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7799 followscs Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7800 ignore Ignore case |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7801 match Match case |
9913
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7802 smart Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used |
11160 | 7803 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
7804 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7805 |
7 | 7806 *'taglength'* *'tl'* |
7807 'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0) | |
7808 global | |
7809 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters. | |
7810 | |
7811 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'* | |
7812 'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
7813 global | |
7814 {not in Vi} | |
824 | 7815 If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that |
7816 tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is. | |
7 | 7817 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
7818 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7819 | |
7820 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433* | |
7821 'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with | |
7822 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS") | |
7823 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
7824 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To | |
7825 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash | |
7826 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes). | |
7827 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path | |
7828 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in | |
7829 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see | |
7830 |tags-option|. | |
7831 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in | |
2522
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7832 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7833 find all files named "tags" below "/lib". The filename itself cannot |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7834 contain wildcards, it is used as-is. E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7835 files called "tags?". {not available when compiled without the |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7836 |+path_extra| feature} |
515 | 7837 The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names |
7838 actually used. | |
7 | 7839 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag |
7840 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The | |
7841 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case | |
7842 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags| | |
7843 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
7844 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
7845 uses another default. | |
7846 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"} | |
7847 | |
7848 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'* | |
7849 'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on) | |
7850 global | |
7851 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
7852 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or | |
7853 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the | |
7854 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or | |
7855 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified | |
7856 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry. | |
7857 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a | |
7858 mapping which should not change the tagstack. | |
7859 | |
7538
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7860 *'tcldll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
7861 'tcldll' string (default depends on the build) |
7538
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7862 global |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7863 {not in Vi} |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7864 {only available when compiled with the |+tcl/dyn| |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7865 feature} |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7866 Specifies the name of the Tcl shared library. The default is |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7867 DYNAMIC_TCL_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
7868 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7538
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7869 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7870 security reasons. |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7871 |
7 | 7872 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531* |
7873 'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails: | |
7874 in the GUI: "builtin_gui" | |
7875 on Amiga: "amiga" | |
7876 on BeOS: "beos-ansi" | |
7877 on Mac: "mac-ansi" | |
7878 on MiNT: "vt52" | |
7879 on MS-DOS: "pcterm" | |
7880 on OS/2: "os2ansi" | |
7881 on Unix: "ansi" | |
7882 on VMS: "ansi" | |
7883 on Win 32: "win32") | |
7884 global | |
7885 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control | |
7886 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
7887 For example: > | |
7888 :set term=$TERM | |
7889 < See |termcap|. | |
7890 | |
7891 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'* | |
7892 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'* | |
7893 'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm") | |
7894 global | |
7895 {not in Vi} | |
7896 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
7897 feature} | |
7898 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified | |
7899 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping | |
7900 that some languages (such as Arabic) require. | |
7901 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when | |
7902 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored. | |
7903 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that | |
7904 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically. | |
7905 This option is reset when the GUI is started. | |
7906 For further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
7907 | |
7908 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'* | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
7909 'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ GUI: "utf-8"; with |
7 | 7910 Macintosh GUI: "macroman") |
7911 global | |
7912 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
7913 feature} | |
7914 {not in Vi} | |
7915 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character | |
7916 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
7917 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the |
1152 | 7918 display). Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then |
7919 'termencoding' should be "macroman". | |
7 | 7920 *E617* |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
7921 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ GUI. After the GUI has been |
7 | 7922 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8". |
7923 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error | |
7924 message is shown. | |
7080
1a34f5272977
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ac360bf2ca293735fc7c6654dc2b3066f4c62488
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7051
diff
changeset
|
7925 For the Win32 GUI and console versions 'termencoding' is not used, |
7 | 7926 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters. |
7927 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option. | |
7928 This is the normal value. | |
7929 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See | |
7930 |encoding-table|. | |
7931 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or | |
7932 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you | |
7933 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters. | |
7934 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and | |
7935 want to edit a UTF-8 file: > | |
7936 :let &termencoding = &encoding | |
7937 :set encoding=utf-8 | |
7938 < You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8. | |
7939 | |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7940 *'termguicolors'* *'tgc'* *E954* |
9027
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
7941 'termguicolors' 'tgc' boolean (default off) |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
7942 global |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
7943 {not in Vi} |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
7944 {not available when compiled without the |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
7945 |+termguicolors| feature} |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
7946 When on, uses |highlight-guifg| and |highlight-guibg| attributes in |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7947 the terminal (thus using 24-bit color). |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
7948 |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7949 Requires a ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal. If setting this option |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7950 does not work (produces a colorless UI) reading |xterm-true-color| |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7951 might help. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7952 |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7953 For Win32 console, Windows 10 version 1703 (Creators Update) or later |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7954 is required. Use this check to find out: > |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
7955 if has('vcon') |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
7956 < This requires Vim to be built with the |+vtp| feature. |
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
7957 |
11473 | 7958 Note that the "cterm" attributes are still used, not the "gui" ones. |
11160 | 7959 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
9027
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
7960 |
13735 | 7961 *'termwinscroll'* *'twsl'* |
7962 'termwinscroll' 'twsl' number (default 10000) | |
7963 local to buffer | |
13680
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
7964 {not in Vi} |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
7965 {not available when compiled without the |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
7966 |+terminal| feature} |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
7967 Number of scrollback lines to keep. When going over this limit the |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
7968 first 10% of the scrollback lines are deleted. This is just to reduce |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
7969 the memory usage. See |Terminal-Normal|. |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
7970 |
13735 | 7971 *'termwinkey'* *'twk'* |
7972 'termwinkey' 'twk' string (default "") | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
7973 local to window |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
7974 {not in Vi} |
11914 | 7975 The key that starts a CTRL-W command in a terminal window. Other keys |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
7976 are sent to the job running in the window. |
11914 | 7977 The <> notation can be used, e.g.: > |
13735 | 7978 :set termwinkey=<C-L> |
11914 | 7979 < The string must be one key stroke but can be multiple bytes. |
7980 When not set CTRL-W is used, so that CTRL-W : gets you to the command | |
13735 | 7981 line. If 'termwinkey' is set to CTRL-L then CTRL-L : gets you to the |
11914 | 7982 command line. |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
7983 |
13735 | 7984 *'termwinsize'* *'tws'* |
7985 'termwinsize' 'tws' string (default "") | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
7986 local to window |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
7987 {not in Vi} |
13700
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7988 Size of the |terminal| window. Format: {rows}x{columns} or |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7989 {rows}*{columns}. |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
7990 - When empty the terminal gets the size from the window. |
13700
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7991 - When set with a "x" (e.g., "24x80") the terminal size is not |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7992 adjusted to the window size. If the window is smaller only the |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7993 top-left part is displayed. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7994 - When set with a "*" (e.g., "10*50") the terminal size follows the |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7995 window size, but will not be smaller than the specified rows and/or |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7996 columns. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7997 - When rows is zero then use the height of the window. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7998 - When columns is zero then use the width of the window. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
7999 - Using "0x0" or "0*0" is the same as empty. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8000 |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8001 Examples: |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8002 "30x0" uses 30 rows and the current window width. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8003 "20*0" uses at least 20 rows and the current window width. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8004 "0*40" uses the current window height and at least 40 columns. |
11757
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
8005 Note that the command running in the terminal window may still change |
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
8006 the size of the terminal. In that case the Vim window will be |
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
8007 adjusted to that size, if possible. |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8008 |
7 | 8009 *'terse'* *'noterse'* |
8010 'terse' boolean (default off) | |
8011 global | |
8012 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message | |
8013 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being | |
8014 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi | |
8015 shortens a lot of messages} | |
8016 | |
8017 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'* | |
8018 'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
8019 global | |
8020 {not in Vi} | |
8021 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'. | |
8022 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is | |
8023 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is | |
8024 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty. | |
8025 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
8026 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
8027 | |
8028 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'* | |
8029 'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on, | |
8030 others: default off) | |
8031 local to buffer | |
8032 {not in Vi} | |
8033 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'. | |
8034 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is | |
8035 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to | |
8036 "unix". | |
8037 | |
8038 *'textwidth'* *'tw'* | |
8039 'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0) | |
8040 local to buffer | |
8041 {not in Vi} | |
8042 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be | |
8043 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8044 this. |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8045 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8046 when 'paste' is reset. |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8047 When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also |
7 | 8048 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. |
838 | 8049 When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line. |
7 | 8050 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
8051 | |
8052 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'* | |
8053 'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "") | |
8054 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
8055 {not in Vi} | |
8056 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
10 | 8057 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in |
7 | 8058 the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by |
8059 non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line | |
8060 length is 510 bytes. | |
3496
d1e4abe8342c
Fixed compatible mode in most runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3493
diff
changeset
|
8061 To obtain a file to be used here, check out this ftp site: |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
8062 [Sorry this link doesn't work anymore, do you know the right one?] |
3496
d1e4abe8342c
Fixed compatible mode in most runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3493
diff
changeset
|
8063 ftp://ftp.ox.ac.uk/pub/wordlists/ First get the README file. |
10 | 8064 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 8065 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
8066 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
8067 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
8068 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
8069 uses another default. | |
8070 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
8071 | |
8072 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'* | |
8073 'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off) | |
8074 global | |
8075 {not in Vi} | |
8076 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator. | |
8077 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
8078 | |
8079 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'* | |
8080 'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on) | |
8081 global | |
8082 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'* | |
11400
0f8713fe20dc
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11262
diff
changeset
|
8083 'ttimeout' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 8084 global |
8085 {not in Vi} | |
8086 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a | |
8087 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received: | |
8088 | |
8089 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~ | |
8090 off off do not time out | |
8091 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes | |
8092 off on time out on key codes | |
8093 | |
8094 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete | |
8095 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there | |
8096 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For | |
8097 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next | |
8098 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'. | |
8099 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for | |
8100 the next character to arrive. After that the already received | |
8101 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can | |
8102 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option. | |
8103 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause | |
8104 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits | |
8105 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start | |
8106 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have | |
8107 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key | |
8108 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and | |
8109 reset the 'timeout' option. | |
8110 | |
8111 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
8112 | |
8113 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'* | |
8114 'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000) | |
8115 global | |
8116 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
8117 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'* | |
11400
0f8713fe20dc
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11262
diff
changeset
|
8118 'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1, set to 100 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 8119 global |
8120 {not in Vi} | |
8121 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key | |
8122 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G | |
8123 when part of a command has been typed. | |
8124 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a | |
8125 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to | |
8126 a non-negative number. | |
8127 | |
8128 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~ | |
8129 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen' | |
8130 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen' | |
8131 | |
8132 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options | |
8133 tell so. A useful setting would be > | |
8134 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100 | |
8135 < (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after | |
8136 a tenth of a second). | |
8137 | |
8138 *'title'* *'notitle'* | |
8139 'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
8140 global | |
8141 {not in Vi} | |
8142 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
8143 feature} | |
8144 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of | |
8145 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to: | |
8146 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM | |
8147 Where: | |
8148 filename the name of the file being edited | |
8149 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off | |
8150 + indicates the file was modified | |
8151 = indicates the file is read-only | |
8152 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified | |
8153 (path) is the path of the file being edited | |
8154 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM" | |
8155 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles | |
8156 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and | |
8157 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and | |
8158 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap). | |
8159 *X11* | |
8160 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
8161 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11" | |
8162 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also | |
8163 works for the icon name |'icon'|. | |
8164 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title | |
8165 will not work (except in the GUI). | |
8166 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'. | |
8167 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then. | |
8168 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command: | |
8169 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY & | |
8170 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the | |
8171 title of the window should change back to what it should be after | |
8172 exiting Vim. | |
8173 | |
8174 *'titlelen'* | |
8175 'titlelen' number (default 85) | |
8176 global | |
8177 {not in Vi} | |
8178 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
8179 feature} | |
8180 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window | |
10 | 8181 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is |
8182 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this. | |
7 | 8183 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But |
8184 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters | |
8185 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title | |
8186 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise, | |
8187 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used. | |
8188 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option. | |
8189 | |
8190 *'titleold'* | |
8191 'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim") | |
8192 global | |
8193 {not in Vi} | |
8194 {only available when compiled with the |+title| | |
8195 feature} | |
8196 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the | |
8197 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or | |
8198 'titlestring' is not empty. | |
36 | 8199 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
8200 security reasons. | |
7 | 8201 *'titlestring'* |
8202 'titlestring' string (default "") | |
8203 global | |
8204 {not in Vi} | |
8205 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
8206 feature} | |
8207 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the | |
8208 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on. | |
8209 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently | |
8210 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a | |
8211 non-empty 't_ts' option). | |
8212 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
8213 be restored if possible, see |X11|. |
7 | 8214 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be |
8215 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. | |
8216 Example: > | |
8217 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p") | |
8218 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70 | |
8219 < The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right | |
8220 of the available space. | |
8221 Some people prefer to have the file name first: > | |
8222 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%) | |
8223 < Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file, | |
10 | 8224 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a |
7 | 8225 separating space only when needed. |
8226 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display | |
8227 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character). | |
8228 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
8229 | |
8230 *'toolbar'* *'tb'* | |
8231 'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips") | |
8232 global | |
8233 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and | |
8234 |+GUI_Photon|} | |
10 | 8235 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The |
7 | 8236 possible values are: |
8237 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons. | |
8238 text Toolbar buttons shown with text. | |
8239 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are | |
10 | 8240 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI} |
7 | 8241 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons. |
8242 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse | |
8243 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment. | |
8244 | |
8245 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the | |
8246 following: > | |
8247 :set tb=icons,text | |
8248 < Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They | |
8249 will show icons if both are requested. | |
8250 | |
8251 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if | |
8252 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable | |
8253 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: > | |
8254 :set guioptions-=T | |
8255 < Also see |gui-toolbar|. | |
8256 | |
8257 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'* | |
8258 'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small") | |
8259 global | |
8260 {not in Vi} | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
8261 {only in the GTK+ GUI} |
7 | 8262 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are: |
8497
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8263 tiny Use tiny icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8264 small Use small icons (default). |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8265 medium Use medium-sized icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8266 large Use large icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8267 huge Use even larger icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8268 giant Use very big icons. |
7 | 8269 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on |
8497
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8270 the current theme. Common dimensions are giant=48x48, huge=32x32, |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8271 large=24x24, medium=24x24, small=20x20 and tiny=16x16. |
7 | 8272 |
8273 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined | |
8274 by user preferences or the current theme is used. | |
8275 | |
8276 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'* | |
8277 'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on) | |
8278 global | |
8279 {not in Vi} | |
8280 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones. | |
8281 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones. | |
8282 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for | |
8283 the change to take effect, for example: > | |
8284 :set notbi term=$TERM | |
8285 < See also |termcap|. | |
8286 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin | |
8287 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty | |
8288 xterm entries...). | |
8289 | |
8290 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'* | |
8291 'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm, | |
8292 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or | |
8293 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in | |
8294 a DOS console) | |
8295 global | |
8296 {not in Vi} | |
8297 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to | |
8298 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line | |
8299 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple | |
8300 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region. | |
8301 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen | |
8302 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the | |
8303 mouse in an xterm and other terminals. | |
8304 | |
8305 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'* | |
8306 'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term') | |
8307 global | |
8308 {not in Vi} | |
8309 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not | |
8310 available when compiled without |+mouse|} | |
8311 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized. | |
1213 | 8312 Currently these strings are valid: |
7 | 8313 *xterm-mouse* |
8314 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
8315 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes: | |
8316 "s" = button state | |
8317 "c" = column plus 33 | |
8318 "r" = row plus 33 | |
5908 | 8319 This only works up to 223 columns! See "dec", |
8320 "urxvt", and "sgr" for solutions. | |
7 | 8321 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the |
8322 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works | |
8323 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at | |
180 | 8324 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to |
7 | 8325 work. See below for how Vim detects this |
8326 automatically. | |
8327 *netterm-mouse* | |
8328 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
8329 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers | |
8330 for the row and column. | |
8331 *dec-mouse* | |
8332 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a | |
8333 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[". | |
189 | 8334 This is also available for an Xterm, if it was |
8335 configured with "--enable-dec-locator". | |
7 | 8336 *jsbterm-mouse* |
8337 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling. | |
8338 *pterm-mouse* | |
8339 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling. | |
3224 | 8340 *urxvt-mouse* |
8341 urxvt Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal. | |
5908 | 8342 The mouse works only if the terminal supports this |
8343 encoding style, but it does not have 223 columns limit | |
8344 unlike "xterm" or "xterm2". | |
3750 | 8345 *sgr-mouse* |
8346 sgr Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled | |
5908 | 8347 mouse reporting. The mouse works even in columns |
8348 beyond 223. This option is backward compatible with | |
8349 "xterm2" because it can also decode "xterm2" style | |
8350 mouse codes. | |
7 | 8351 |
8352 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm| | |
5908 | 8353 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm| |+mouse_jsbterm| |+mouse_urxvt| |
8354 |+mouse_sgr|. | |
7 | 8355 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always |
8356 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes | |
8357 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not | |
5908 | 8358 "xterm", "xterm2", "urxvt" or "sgr" (because dec mouse codes conflict |
8359 with them). | |
7 | 8360 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is |
10272
57b2b8268d3a
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4575876dc865d4160f20d61bd822fbe7cafbec41
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10261
diff
changeset
|
8361 set to a name that starts with "xterm", "mlterm", "screen", "tmux", |
57b2b8268d3a
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4575876dc865d4160f20d61bd822fbe7cafbec41
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10261
diff
changeset
|
8362 "st" (full match only), "st-" or "stterm", and 'ttymouse' is not set |
57b2b8268d3a
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4575876dc865d4160f20d61bd822fbe7cafbec41
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10261
diff
changeset
|
8363 already. |
5908 | 8364 Additionally, if vim is compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and |
8365 |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the xterm version | |
8366 number, more intelligent detection process runs. | |
7 | 8367 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be |
5908 | 8368 from 95 to 276. The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is |
12968 | 8369 277 or higher and when Vim detects Mac Terminal.app or iTerm2. |
5908 | 8370 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" or "sgr" |
8371 automatically, set t_RV to an empty string: > | |
7 | 8372 :set t_RV= |
8373 < | |
8374 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'* | |
8375 'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999) | |
8376 global | |
8377 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines | |
8378 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is | |
8379 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number, | |
8380 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying. | |
8381 | |
8382 *'ttytype'* *'tty'* | |
8383 'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM) | |
8384 global | |
8385 Alias for 'term', see above. | |
8386 | |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8387 *'undodir'* *'udir'* |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8388 'undodir' 'udir' string (default ".") |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8389 global |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8390 {not in Vi} |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8391 {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8392 List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas. |
2220
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
8393 See |'backupdir'| for details of the format. |
2218
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8394 "." means using the directory of the file. The undo file name for |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8395 "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~". |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8396 For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8397 file, with path separators replaced with "%". |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8398 When writing: The first directory that exists is used. "." always |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8399 works, no directories after "." will be used for writing. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8400 When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file. The first |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8401 undo file that exists is used. When it cannot be read an error is |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8402 given, no further entry is used. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8403 See |undo-persistence|. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8404 |
4681
2eb30f341e8d
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
8405 *'undofile'* *'noundofile'* *'udf'* *'noudf'* |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8406 'undofile' 'udf' boolean (default off) |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8407 local to buffer |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8408 {not in Vi} |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8409 {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8410 When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8411 writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8412 file on buffer read. |
2220
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
8413 The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'. |
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
8414 For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|. |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8415 The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8416 before a reload to be saved for undo. |
3920 | 8417 When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted. |
11160 | 8418 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8419 |
7 | 8420 *'undolevels'* *'ul'* |
8421 'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS, | |
8422 Win32 and OS/2) | |
5446 | 8423 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 8424 {not in Vi} |
8425 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information | |
8426 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used | |
8427 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory). | |
8428 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes | |
8429 itself: > | |
8430 set ul=0 | |
8431 < But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in | |
8432 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo. | |
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2240
diff
changeset
|
8433 Also see |undo-two-ways|. |
5446 | 8434 Set to -1 for no undo at all. You might want to do this only for the |
8435 current buffer: > | |
8436 setlocal ul=-1 | |
7 | 8437 < This helps when you run out of memory for a single change. |
6336 | 8438 |
8439 The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used. | |
8440 | |
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2240
diff
changeset
|
8441 Also see |clear-undo|. |
7 | 8442 |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8443 *'undoreload'* *'ur'* |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8444 'undoreload' 'ur' number (default 10000) |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8445 global |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8446 {not in Vi} |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8447 Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it. This applies to the |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8448 ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8449 Vim. |FileChangedShell| |
12559 | 8450 The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8451 of lines is smaller than the value of this option. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8452 Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8453 |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8454 When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8455 |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8456 Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory. Set |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8457 this option to a lower value if you run out of memory. |
7 | 8458 |
8459 *'updatecount'* *'uc'* | |
8460 'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200) | |
8461 global | |
8462 {not in Vi} | |
8463 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to | |
8464 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on | |
8465 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting | |
8466 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly | |
8467 mode this option will be initialized to 10000. | |
8468 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|. | |
8469 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are | |
8470 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount' | |
8471 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted. | |
8472 Also see |'swapsync'|. | |
8473 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile" | |
8474 or "nowrite". | |
8475 | |
8476 *'updatetime'* *'ut'* | |
8477 'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000) | |
8478 global | |
8479 {not in Vi} | |
8480 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be | |
8481 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the | |
8482 |CursorHold| autocommand event. | |
8483 | |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8484 *'varsofttabstop'* *'vsts'* |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8485 'varsofttabstop' 'vsts' string (default "") |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8486 local to buffer |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8487 {only available when compiled with the |+vartabs| |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8488 feature} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8489 {not in Vi} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8490 A list of the number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while editing, |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8491 such as inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like variable- |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8492 width <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mixture of spaces |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8493 and <Tab>s is used. Tab widths are separated with commas, with the |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8494 final value applying to all subsequent tabs. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8495 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8496 For example, when editing assembly language files where statements |
14249
4543777545a3
Updated runtime and language files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14175
diff
changeset
|
8497 start in the 9th column and comments in the 41st, it may be useful |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8498 to use the following: > |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8499 :set varsofttabstop=8,32,8 |
14249
4543777545a3
Updated runtime and language files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14175
diff
changeset
|
8500 < This will set soft tabstops with 8 and 8 + 32 spaces, and 8 more |
4543777545a3
Updated runtime and language files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14175
diff
changeset
|
8501 for every column thereafter. |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8502 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8503 Note that the value of |'softtabstop'| will be ignored while |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8504 'varsofttabstop' is set. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8505 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8506 *'vartabstop'* *'vts'* |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8507 'vartabstop' 'vts' string (default "") |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8508 local to buffer |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8509 {only available when compiled with the |+vartabs| |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8510 feature} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8511 {not in Vi} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8512 A list of the number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for, |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8513 separated by commas. Each value corresponds to one tab, with the |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8514 final value applying to all subsequent tabs. For example: > |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8515 :set vartabstop=4,20,10,8 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8516 < This will make the first tab 4 spaces wide, the second 20 spaces, |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8517 the third 10 spaces, and all following tabs 8 spaces. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8518 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8519 Note that the value of |'tabstop'| will be ignored while 'vartabstop' |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8520 is set. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8521 |
7 | 8522 *'verbose'* *'vbs'* |
8523 'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0) | |
8524 global | |
8525 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean | |
8526 verbose option} | |
8527 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing. | |
8528 Currently, these messages are given: | |
8529 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written. | |
8530 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed. | |
712 | 8531 >= 5 Every searched tags file and include file. |
7 | 8532 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed. |
8533 >= 9 Every executed autocommand. | |
8534 >= 12 Every executed function. | |
8535 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded. | |
8536 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause. | |
8537 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters). | |
8538 | |
8539 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|. | |
8540 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command. | |
8541 | |
293 | 8542 When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not |
8543 displayed. | |
8544 | |
8545 *'verbosefile'* *'vfile'* | |
8546 'verbosefile' 'vfile' string (default empty) | |
8547 global | |
8548 {not in Vi} | |
8549 When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name. | |
8550 When the file exists messages are appended. | |
8551 Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made | |
2265
b7cb69ab616d
Added salt to blowfish encryption.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2250
diff
changeset
|
8552 empty. Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time. |
293 | 8553 Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first. |
8554 The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not | |
8555 displayed when 'verbosefile' is set. | |
8556 | |
7 | 8557 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'* |
8558 'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32: | |
8559 "$VIM/vimfiles/view", | |
8560 for Unix: "~/.vim/view", | |
8561 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view" | |
8562 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view" | |
8563 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view") | |
8564 global | |
8565 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8566 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 8567 feature} |
8568 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|. | |
8569 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
8570 security reasons. | |
8571 | |
8572 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'* | |
12824
79a754456110
patch 8.0.1289: mkview always includes the local directory
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12802
diff
changeset
|
8573 'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor,curdir") |
7 | 8574 global |
8575 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8576 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 8577 feature} |
8578 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated | |
10 | 8579 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something: |
7 | 8580 word save and restore ~ |
8581 cursor cursor position in file and in window | |
8582 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
8583 fold options | |
8584 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
8585 global values for local options) | |
6213 | 8586 localoptions same as "options" |
7 | 8587 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward |
8588 slashes | |
8589 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when | |
8590 on Windows or DOS | |
12824
79a754456110
patch 8.0.1289: mkview always includes the local directory
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12802
diff
changeset
|
8591 curdir the window-local directory, if set with `:lcd` |
7 | 8592 |
8593 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files | |
8594 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
8595 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
8596 | |
8597 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528* | |
8598 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS, | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8599 Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8600 for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8601 for others: '100,<50,s10,h) |
7 | 8602 global |
8603 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8604 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| |
7 | 8605 feature} |
8606 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written | |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8607 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). Except when 'viminfofile' is |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8608 "NONE". |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8609 The string should be a comma separated list of parameters, each |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8610 consisting of a single character identifying the particular parameter, |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8611 followed by a number or string which specifies the value of that |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8612 parameter. If a particular character is left out, then the default |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8613 value is used for that parameter. The following is a list of the |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8614 identifying characters and the effect of their value. |
7 | 8615 CHAR VALUE ~ |
3224 | 8616 *viminfo-!* |
7 | 8617 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start |
8618 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase | |
8619 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis" | |
2607 | 8620 and "_K_L_M" are not. Nested List and Dict items may not be |
2642 | 8621 read back correctly, you end up with an empty item. |
3224 | 8622 *viminfo-quote* |
7 | 8623 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of |
8624 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a | |
8625 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the | |
8626 start of a comment! | |
3224 | 8627 *viminfo-%* |
7 | 8628 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is |
8629 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not | |
8630 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the | |
7272
17333ebd2bbd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d042dc825c9b97dacd84d4728f88300da4d5b6b9
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7266
diff
changeset
|
8631 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Quickfix |
17333ebd2bbd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d042dc825c9b97dacd84d4728f88300da4d5b6b9
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7266
diff
changeset
|
8632 ('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on |
17333ebd2bbd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d042dc825c9b97dacd84d4728f88300da4d5b6b9
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7266
diff
changeset
|
8633 removable media (|viminfo-r|) are not saved. |
23 | 8634 When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum |
8635 number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all | |
8636 buffers are stored. | |
3224 | 8637 *viminfo-'* |
7 | 8638 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks |
8639 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when | |
8640 'viminfo' is non-empty. | |
8641 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the | |
8642 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file. | |
3224 | 8643 *viminfo-/* |
7 | 8644 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be |
10 | 8645 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute |
7 | 8646 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of |
8647 'history' is used. | |
3224 | 8648 *viminfo-:* |
7 | 8649 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be |
10 | 8650 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
3224 | 8651 *viminfo-<* |
7 | 8652 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then |
8653 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are | |
8654 saved. '"' is the old name for this item. | |
8655 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte. | |
3224 | 8656 *viminfo-@* |
7 | 8657 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be |
10 | 8658 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
3224 | 8659 *viminfo-c* |
7 | 8660 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the |
8661 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current | |
233 | 8662 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|. |
3224 | 8663 *viminfo-f* |
7 | 8664 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0 |
8665 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when | |
10 | 8666 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current |
7 | 8667 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo"). |
3224 | 8668 *viminfo-h* |
7 | 8669 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo |
8670 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch" | |
8671 has been used since the last search command. | |
3224 | 8672 *viminfo-n* |
7 | 8673 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8674 the 'n'. Must be at the end of the option! If the |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8675 'viminfofile' option is set, that file name overrides the one |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8676 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are |
9464
be72f4201a1d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/063b9d15abea041a5bfff3ffc4e219e26fd1d4fa
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9407
diff
changeset
|
8677 expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option. |
3224 | 8678 *viminfo-r* |
7 | 8679 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next |
8680 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each | |
8681 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be | |
8682 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you | |
8683 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can | |
8684 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is | |
8685 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50 | |
8686 characters. | |
3224 | 8687 *viminfo-s* |
7 | 8688 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are |
8689 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default | |
8690 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text. | |
8691 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit. | |
8692 | |
8693 Example: > | |
8694 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo | |
8695 < | |
8696 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you | |
8697 edited. | |
8698 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be | |
8699 remembered. | |
8700 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped. | |
8701 :0 Command-line history will not be saved. | |
8702 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo". | |
8703 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used, | |
8704 that is, save all of the search history, and also the | |
8705 previous search and substitute patterns. | |
8706 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back. | |
8707 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored. | |
8708 | |
8709 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to | |
8710 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically. | |
8711 | |
8712 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
8713 security reasons. | |
11160 | 8714 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
8715 is reset. | |
7 | 8716 |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8717 *'viminfofile'* *'vif'* |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8718 'viminfofile' 'vif' string (default: "") |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8719 global |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8720 {not in Vi} |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8721 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8722 feature} |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8723 When non-empty, overrides the file name used for viminfo. |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8724 When equal to "NONE" no viminfo file will be read or written. |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8725 This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag. The |--clean| |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8726 command line flag sets it to "NONE". |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8727 |
7 | 8728 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'* |
8729 'virtualedit' 've' string (default "") | |
8730 global | |
8731 {not in Vi} | |
8732 {not available when compiled without the | |
8733 |+virtualedit| feature} | |
8734 A comma separated list of these words: | |
8735 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode. | |
8736 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode. | |
8737 all Allow virtual editing in all modes. | |
772 | 8738 onemore Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line |
782 | 8739 |
7 | 8740 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is |
1263 | 8741 no actual character. This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end |
7 | 8742 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and |
8743 editing a table. | |
772 | 8744 "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just |
8745 after the last character of the line. This makes some commands more | |
8746 consistent. Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line | |
8747 if the line was empty. But it is far from Vi compatible. It may also | |
782 | 8748 break some plugins or Vim scripts. For example because |l| can move |
8749 the cursor after the last character. Use with care! | |
5220 | 8750 Using the `$` command will move to the last character in the line, not |
782 | 8751 past it. This may actually move the cursor to the left! |
5220 | 8752 The `g$` command will move to the end of the screen line. |
772 | 8753 It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will |
8754 not get a warning for it. | |
11160 | 8755 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 8756 |
8757 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep* | |
8758 'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off) | |
8759 global | |
8760 {not in Vi} | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8761 Use a visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the |
7 | 8762 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted, |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8763 use: > |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8764 :set vb t_vb= |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8765 < If you want a short flash, you can use this on many terminals: > |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8766 :set vb t_vb=[?5h$<100>[?5l |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8767 < Here $<100> specifies the time, you can use a smaller or bigger value |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8768 to get a shorter or longer flash. |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8769 |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8770 Note: Vim will limit the bell to once per half a second. This avoids |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8771 having to wait for the flashing to finish when there are lots of |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8772 bells, e.g. on key repeat. This also happens without 'visualbell' |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8773 set. |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8774 |
7 | 8775 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display |
8776 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f", | |
8777 where 40 is the time in msec. | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8778 |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8779 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8780 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|. |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8781 |
7 | 8782 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash. |
8783 Also see 'errorbells'. | |
8784 | |
8785 *'warn'* *'nowarn'* | |
8786 'warn' boolean (default on) | |
8787 global | |
8788 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer | |
8789 has been changed. | |
8790 | |
8791 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'* | |
8792 'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off) | |
8793 global | |
8794 {not in Vi} | |
667 | 8795 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' terminal option. |
7 | 8796 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x. |
8797 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and | |
8798 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running. | |
8799 | |
8800 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'* | |
8801 'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "") | |
8802 global | |
8803 {not in Vi} | |
8804 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the | |
8805 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in | |
8806 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys: | |
8807 char key mode ~ | |
8808 b <BS> Normal and Visual | |
8809 s <Space> Normal and Visual | |
712 | 8810 h "h" Normal and Visual (not recommended) |
8811 l "l" Normal and Visual (not recommended) | |
7 | 8812 < <Left> Normal and Visual |
8813 > <Right> Normal and Visual | |
8814 ~ "~" Normal | |
8815 [ <Left> Insert and Replace | |
8816 ] <Right> Insert and Replace | |
8817 For example: > | |
8818 :set ww=<,>,[,] | |
8819 < allows wrap only when cursor keys are used. | |
8820 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change | |
8821 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h" | |
8822 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This | |
8823 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and | |
8824 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping | |
8825 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the | |
8826 cursor. | |
714 | 8827 When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a |
8828 line then it will not move to the next line. This makes "dl", "cl", | |
8829 "yl" etc. work normally. | |
7 | 8830 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
8831 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
8832 | |
8833 *'wildchar'* *'wc'* | |
8834 'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E) | |
8835 global | |
8836 {not in Vi} | |
8837 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the | |
8838 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'. | |
1621 | 8839 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 8840 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See |
8841 'wildcharm' for that. | |
8842 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: > | |
8843 :set wc=<Esc> | |
8844 < NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
8845 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
8846 | |
8847 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'* | |
8848 'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0)) | |
8849 global | |
8850 {not in Vi} | |
8851 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is | |
233 | 8852 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line |
8853 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally | |
7 | 8854 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that |
8855 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: > | |
8856 :set wcm=<C-Z> | |
1621 | 8857 :cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z> |
7 | 8858 < Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N. |
8859 | |
8860 *'wildignore'* *'wig'* | |
8861 'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "") | |
8862 global | |
8863 {not in Vi} | |
8864 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
8865 feature} | |
8866 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these | |
3682 | 8867 patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or |
8868 directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and | |
8869 |globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this. | |
7 | 8870 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. |
8871 Also see 'suffixes'. | |
8872 Example: > | |
8873 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj | |
8874 < The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
8875 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
8876 uses another default. | |
8877 | |
2652 | 8878 |
2662 | 8879 *'wildignorecase'* *'wic'* *'nowildignorecase'* *'nowic'* |
2652 | 8880 'wildignorecase' 'wic' boolean (default off) |
8881 global | |
8882 {not in Vi} | |
8883 When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories. | |
4242 | 8884 Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set. |
2652 | 8885 Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which |
8886 happens when there are special characters. | |
8887 | |
8888 | |
7 | 8889 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
8890 'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 8891 global |
8892 {not in Vi} | |
8893 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu| | |
8894 feature} | |
8895 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced | |
8896 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion, | |
8897 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the | |
8898 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is | |
8899 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or | |
8900 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match. | |
8901 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is | |
8902 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode. | |
4159 | 8903 You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|. |
7 | 8904 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on |
8905 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls | |
8906 as needed. | |
8907 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used | |
8908 for selecting a completion. | |
8909 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special | |
8910 meanings: | |
8911 | |
8912 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N) | |
8913 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a | |
8914 subdirectory or submenu. | |
8915 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a | |
8916 dot: move into a submenu. | |
8917 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into | |
8918 parent directory or parent menu. | |
8919 | |
8920 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|. | |
8921 | |
8922 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead | |
8923 of selecting a different match, use this: > | |
8924 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left> | |
8925 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right> | |
8926 < | |
8927 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match | |
8928 |hl-WildMenu|. | |
8929 | |
8930 *'wildmode'* *'wim'* | |
8931 'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full") | |
8932 global | |
8933 {not in Vi} | |
8934 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with | |
10 | 8935 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each |
1152 | 8936 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'. The |
7 | 8937 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar', |
8938 The second part for the second use, etc. | |
8939 These are the possible values for each part: | |
8940 "" Complete only the first match. | |
8941 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match, | |
8942 the original string is used and then the first match | |
8943 again. | |
8944 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't | |
8945 result in a longer string, use the next part. | |
8946 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is | |
8947 enabled. | |
8948 "list" When more than one match, list all matches. | |
8949 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
8950 complete first match. | |
8951 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
8952 complete till longest common string. | |
8953 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases. | |
8954 | |
8955 Examples: > | |
8956 :set wildmode=full | |
233 | 8957 < Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) > |
7 | 8958 :set wildmode=longest,full |
8959 < Complete longest common string, then each full match > | |
8960 :set wildmode=list:full | |
8961 < List all matches and complete each full match > | |
8962 :set wildmode=list,full | |
8963 < List all matches without completing, then each full match > | |
8964 :set wildmode=longest,list | |
8965 < Complete longest common string, then list alternatives. | |
1621 | 8966 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 8967 |
40 | 8968 *'wildoptions'* *'wop'* |
8969 'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "") | |
8970 global | |
8971 {not in Vi} | |
8972 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
8973 feature} | |
8974 A list of words that change how command line completion is done. | |
8975 Currently only one word is allowed: | |
8976 tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of | |
856 | 8977 tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match |
40 | 8978 is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are: |
8979 d #define | |
8980 f function | |
8981 Also see |cmdline-completion|. | |
8982 | |
7 | 8983 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'* |
8984 'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu") | |
8985 global | |
8986 {not in Vi} | |
8987 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI} | |
8988 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT | |
8989 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the | |
8990 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and | |
8991 entering special characters. This option tells what to do: | |
8992 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be | |
8993 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be | |
8994 done with the |:simalt| command. | |
8995 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key | |
8996 combinations cannot be mapped. | |
8997 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu | |
10 | 8998 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other |
7 | 8999 keys can be mapped. |
9000 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT | |
9001 key is never used for the menu. | |
36 | 9002 This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will |
9003 select the menu, unless it has been mapped. | |
7 | 9004 |
164 | 9005 *'window'* *'wi'* |
9006 'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1) | |
9007 global | |
9008 Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, | |
9009 use 'lines' for that. | |
179 | 9010 Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the |
9011 value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll | |
9012 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one. | |
164 | 9013 When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll |
9014 in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines. | |
9015 When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than | |
9016 or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1. | |
9017 {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines} | |
9018 | |
7 | 9019 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591* |
9020 'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1) | |
9021 global | |
9022 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9023 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 9024 feature} |
9025 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard | |
10 | 9026 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the |
1621 | 9027 focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the |
9028 cost of the height of other windows. | |
9029 Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing. | |
9030 Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen. | |
9031 Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high. This has the drawback | |
9032 that ":all" will create only two windows. To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4" | |
9033 to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done, | |
9034 using the |VimEnter| event: > | |
9035 au VimEnter * set winheight=999 | |
9036 < Minimum value is 1. | |
9037 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the | |
7 | 9038 height of the current window. |
9039 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set | |
9040 the minimal height for other windows. | |
9041 | |
9042 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'* | |
9043 'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off) | |
9044 local to window | |
9045 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9046 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 9047 feature} |
9048 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 9049 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. Set by default for the |
9050 |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|. | |
7 | 9051 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
9052 | |
782 | 9053 *'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'* |
9054 'winfixwidth' 'wfw' boolean (default off) | |
9055 local to window | |
9056 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9057 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
782 | 9058 feature} |
9059 Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 9060 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. |
782 | 9061 The width may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
9062 | |
7 | 9063 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'* |
9064 'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1) | |
9065 global | |
9066 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9067 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 9068 feature} |
9069 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
9070 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
9071 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a | |
9072 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when | |
9073 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.) | |
9074 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window. | |
9075 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
9076 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
9077 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable. | |
9078 | |
9079 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'* | |
9080 'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1) | |
9081 global | |
9082 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9083 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 9084 feature} |
9085 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
9086 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
9087 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just | |
9088 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one | |
9089 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere | |
9090 to go.) | |
9091 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window. | |
9092 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
9093 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
9094 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable. | |
9095 | |
12138
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9096 *'winptydll'* |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9097 'winptydll' string (default "winpty32.dll" or "winpty64.dll") |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9098 global |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9099 {not in Vi} |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9100 {only available when compiled with the |terminal| |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9101 feature on MS-Windows} |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9102 Specifies the name of the winpty shared library, used for the |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9103 |:terminal| command. The default depends on whether was build as a |
12254 | 9104 32-bit or 64-bit executable. If not found, "winpty.dll" is tried as |
12138
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9105 a fallback. |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9106 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9107 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9108 security reasons. |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9109 |
7 | 9110 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592* |
9111 'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20) | |
9112 global | |
9113 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9114 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 9115 feature} |
9116 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard | |
9117 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If | |
9118 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of | |
9119 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window | |
9120 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing. | |
9121 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the | |
9122 width of the current window. | |
9123 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set | |
9124 the minimal width for other windows. | |
9125 | |
9126 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'* | |
9127 'wrap' boolean (default on) | |
9128 local to window | |
9129 {not in Vi} | |
9130 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text | |
9131 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that. | |
9132 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and | |
10 | 9133 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap |
9134 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is | |
7 | 9135 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll |
9136 horizontally. | |
9137 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See | |
9138 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary. | |
9139 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: > | |
9140 :set sidescroll=5 | |
9141 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:> | |
9142 < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
9143 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
9144 on. |
7 | 9145 |
9146 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'* | |
9147 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0) | |
9148 local to buffer | |
9149 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping | |
9150 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted | |
9151 and inserting continues on the next line. | |
9152 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause | |
9153 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible. | |
9154 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
9155 This option is set to 0 when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
9156 is reset. |
7 | 9157 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently |
9158 and less usefully} | |
9159 | |
9160 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'* | |
9161 'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385* | |
9162 global | |
500 | 9163 Searches wrap around the end of the file. Also applies to |]s| and |
9164 |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes. | |
7 | 9165 |
9166 *'write'* *'nowrite'* | |
9167 'write' boolean (default on) | |
9168 global | |
9169 {not in Vi} | |
9170 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed. | |
9171 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are | |
10 | 9172 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line |
7 | 9173 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires |
9174 writing a temporary file. | |
9175 | |
9176 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'* | |
9177 'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off) | |
9178 global | |
9179 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override. | |
9180 | |
9181 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'* | |
9182 'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off | |
9183 otherwise) | |
9184 global | |
9185 {not in Vi} | |
9186 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after | |
9187 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is | |
3513 | 9188 also on. |
9189 WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write | |
9190 your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you | |
9191 lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only reset | |
9192 this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write | |
9193 fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful). | |
9194 See |backup-table| for another explanation. | |
7 | 9195 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. |
9196 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is | |
9197 set. | |
9198 | |
9199 *'writedelay'* *'wd'* | |
9200 'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0) | |
9201 global | |
9202 {not in Vi} | |
9344
33c1b85d408c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/802a0d902fca423acb15f835d7b09183883d79a0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9286
diff
changeset
|
9203 The number of milliseconds to wait for each character sent to the |
7 | 9204 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by |
9205 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes. | |
9206 | |
9207 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |